-
41 βασιλεύω
βασιλεύω fut. βασιλεύσω; 1 aor. ἐβασίλευσα; pf. 3 sg. βεβασίλευκεν 2 Km 5:10 (Hom.+)① to exercise authority at a royal level, be king, rule (B-D-F §177; 233, 2; 234, 5; Rob.: 801, 833, 902).ⓐ of temporal princes τινός over (of) someth. (1 Esdr 1:37; 6:16; 1 Macc 1:16; 11:9 al.) τῆς Ἰουδαίας Mt 2:22 of Archelaus, who was called king without having the official title (Jos., Vi. 5 βασιλεύοντος Ἀρχελάου, Ant. 17, 188ff; 317ff; 18, 93 βασιλεὺς Ἀ.); τοῦ Ἰσραήλ GJs 23:2; τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς IRo 6:1; ἐπί τινα (Gen 37:8; 1 Km 8:9; 12:1 al.) Lk 19:14, 27.—βασιλεῖαι βασιλεύσουσιν ἐπὶ τ. γῆς royal powers will reign on (the) earth (s. ἐπί 1a) B 4:4. On βασιλεὺς τ. βασιλευόντων 1 Ti 6:15 s. βασιλεύς 2b.ⓑ of God and those closely united w. himα. God (Ps.-Phoc. 111) Rv 11:17; 19:6 (s. 2 below for a difft. interpr. of both pass.).β. Christ Lk 1:33; 1 Cor 15:25; εἰς τ. αἰῶνας MPol 21.γ. God and Christ together: their βασιλεία … βασιλεύσει (s. 1a above: B 4:4) εἰς τ. αἰῶνας τ. αἰώνων (cp. Ps 9:37) Rv 11:15.δ. faithful Christians, who have been called to rule w. God Ro 5:17b; Rv 5:10 (ἐπὶ τ. γῆς, as 1a above); 20:4, 6; 22:5 (cp. Da 7:27).② to obtain royal power, become king, so esp. in aor. (Hdt. 1, 130, 1; Thu. 2, 99, 3; Polyb. 5, 40, 6; 4 Km 14:29; 15:1, 7, 10; 1 Macc 1:10 al.) Rv 11:17; 19:6 (for both s. 1bα above); GHb 70, 16–18; Ox 654, 8 (GTh 2). χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε without us you have become kings 1 Cor 4:8 (Appian, Basil. 1a §5 β. has the sense ‘seize the rule’).—DELG. M-M. TW. Spicq. -
42 πολύς
πολύς, [dialect] Att. πολλή, πολύ; gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dat. πολλῷ, ῇ, ῷ; acc. πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—[dialect] Ion. [full] πολλός Anacr.43.3,Aπολλή, πολλόν Xenoph.9
, Democr.219, Hp.VM1, Herod.3.19; also in Trag., S.Ant.86, Tr. 1196; acc. πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: Hdt. uses the [dialect] Ion. forms, but codd. haveπολύν 2.121
.δ, 3.57, v.l. in 6.125,πολύ 2.106
,3.38,6.72,7.46, 160 ( πολύ also in Heraclit.114, Democr. 244):—both sets of forms are found in [dialect] Ep., also gen. sg.πολέος Il.4.244
, etc.: nom. pl.πολέες 2.417
, al., once [var] contr.πολεῖς 11.708
; gen. πολέων (trisyll.) 5.691, (disyll.) 16.655; dat.πολέσι 10.262
,al.;πολέσσι 13.452
, al.;πολέεσσι 9.73
, Od.5.54, Hes.Op. 119, etc.; acc. πολέας (trisyll.) Il.3.126, etc., (disyll.) 1.559,2.4, Hes.Op. 580 (freq. with v.l. πολεῖς Il.15.66, etc.); in later [dialect] Ep. πολέες is used as fem., Call.Del.28, alsoπολέας Id.Dian.42
, A.R.3.21; neut.πολέα Q.S.1.74
(v. infr.):—[dialect] Ep. also have [full] πουλύς (once in Hes., Th. 190, also Thgn. 509, sts. fem. in Hom.,πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρήν Il.10.27
,ἠέρα πουλύν 5.776
), neut.πουλύ Od.19.387
; these forms are found in codd. of Hp. and Aret. (who uses πολύ, πουλύ and πολλόν in neut.), but not in Hdt.:— Lyr. and Trag. (lyr.) sts. use [dialect] Ep. forms, dat. sg. ; nom. pl.πολέες B.10.17
; neut. ; (fem., B.5.100); dat. pl. . [ῠalways.]I of Number, many, Il.2.417, etc.; ἐκ πολλῶν, opp. ἐξὀλίγων, Hes.Th. 447; τριηκόντων ἐτέων πόλλ' ἀπολείπων wanting many of thirty years, Id.Op. 696;παρῆσάν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε Pl.Phd. 58d
;οὐ πολλοί τινες A.Pers. 510
: with Nouns of multitude,πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.8.109
;πλῆθος πολλόν Hdt.1.141
;ἔθνος πολλόν Id.4.22
; later πουλὺ.. ἐπ' ἔτος many a year, AP6.235 (Thall.);π. ἦν ὁ καταπλέων Plb.15.26.10
; of anything often repeated,περὶ σέο λόγος ἀπῖκται π. Hdt.1.30
;πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος Id.2.2
, cf. 3.137, etc.;πολὺ.. τὸ σὸν ὄνομα διήκει πάντας S.OC 305
; often,D.
21.29; τοῦτο ἐπιεικῶς πολὺ νῦν ἐστι is fairly frequent, Luc.Hist.Conscr.15.2 of Size, Degree, Intensity, much, mighty, ὄμβρος, νιφετός, Il.10.6;π. ὕπνος Od.15.394
;πῦρ.. π. 10.359
; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il.18.493; π. ὀρυμαγδός, ῥοῖζος, etc., 2.810, Od.9.315, etc.; π. ἀνάγκη strong necessity, E.Ph. 1674; π. γέλως, βοή, much or great, S.Aj. 303, 1149; μωρία ib. 745; ὄλβος, αἰδώς, A.Pers. 251, Ag. 948;ἀσφάλεια Th.2.11
; ἀλογία, εὐήθεια, Pl.Phd. 67e, Phdr. 275c, etc.b rarely of a single person, great, mighty,μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.7.14
, cf. E.Hipp.1; ὁ π. σοφιστής, στρατηγός, Chor.p.23 B., Id.in Rev.Phil.1.68;ὁ πάντα π. Id.p.27
B.; ὁ πολύς alone, of Hippocrates, Gal.19.530; of Trajan, Lyd.Mag.2.28;ῥώμην σώματος πολύς D.H.2.42
.c joined with a Verb, Κύπρις γὰρ οὐ φορητός, ἢν πολλὴ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, E.Hipp. 443;θρασυνομένῳ καὶ πολλῷ ῥέοντι D. 18.136
; from the wind, ὡς π. ἔπνει καὶ λαμπρός was blowing strong and fresh, Id.25.57, cf. Ar.Eq. 760, AP11.49 (Even.): generally, with might or force,ὅταν ὁ θεὸς.. ἔλθῃ πολύς E.Ba. 300
;ἢν π. παρῇ Id.Or. 1200
;π. καὶ τολμηρὸς ἅνθρωπος D.40.53
: with part. and εἰμί, πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος was all entreaties, Hdt.9.91; ;Ἐτεοκλέης ἂν εἷς π... ὑμνοῖθ' A.Th.6
;π. ἐνέκειτο λέγων Hdt.7.158
;π. τοῖς συμβεβηκόσιν ἔγκειται D.18.199
; alsoπ. ἦν ἐν τοῖσι λόγοισι Hdt.8.59
;πρὸς ταῖς παρασκευαῖς Plb.5.49.7
;ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ D.S.14.107
: without a Prep.,π. ἦν τοῖς ἐπαίνοις καὶ ἐπαχθής Aeschin.2.41
; π. μὲν γὰρ ὁ Φίλιππος ἔσται will be often mentioned, Id.1.166.3 of Value or Worth,πολέος δέ οἱ ἄξιος ἔσται Il.23.562
, cf. Od.8.405;πολλοῦ ἄξιος X.An.4.1.28
, etc.;πολλῶν ἄξιος Ar. Pax 918
; περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τι, Lat. magni facere, cf.περί A.
IV; ἐπὶ πολλῷ at a high price, D.8.53;ἐπὶ π. ἐρραθυμηκότες Id.1.15
; πολύ ἐστί τι it is worth much, of great conscquence, X.Oec.18.7.4 of Space, large, wide, π. χώρη, πεδίον, Il.23.520,4.244, etc.; πόντος, πέλαγος, Hes.Op. 635, S.Ph. 635;χῶρος πλατὺς καὶ π. Hdt.4.39
; λίμνη μεγάλη τε καὶ π. ib. 109;π. ἡ Σικελία Th. 7.13
;π. ἡ Ἑλλάς Pl.Phd. 78a
, etc.; πολλὸς ἔκειτο he lay outstretched wide, Il.7.156, cf. 11.307; π. κέλευθος a far way, A.Pers. 748 (troch.): withoutὁδός, πολλὴ μὲν εἰς Ἡράκλειαν.., πολλὴ δὲ εἰς Χρυσόπολιν.. X.An.6.3.16
: διὰ πολλοῦ, ἐκ πολλοῦ, v. infr. IV.5 of Time, long, (anap.), etc.;πολὺν χρόνον Il.2.343
, etc.;οὐ π. χρ. S.Ph. 348
, etc.; soπολλοῦ χρόνου Ar.Pl.98
;χρόνῳ πολλῷ S.Tr. 228
; διὰ πολλοῦ (sc. χρόνου) Luc.Nec.15;ἐκ πολλοῦ Th.1.58
, D. 21.41; πρὸ πολλοῦ long before, D.S.14.43;οὐ μετὰ πολύ Luc.Tox.54
; ἔτι πολλῆς νυκτός while still quite night, Th.8.101; πολλῆς ὥρας late in the day, Plb.5.8.3;ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35
;ἔτι ἔστιν ἡμέρα πολλή LXX Ge.29.7
.II Special usages:1 c. partit.gen., e.g. πολλοὶ Τρώων, for πολλοὶ Τρῶες, Il.18.271, etc.; neut., πολλὸν σαρκός, for πολλὴ σάρξ, Od.19.450: in Prose, the Adj. generally takes the gender of the gen.,τὸν πολλὸν τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.1.24
; τῆς γῆς οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7;τῆς ἀθάρης πολλήν Ar.Pl. 694
;πολλὴν τῆς χώρας X.Cyr. 3.2.2
;ὁ π. τοῦ λόγου D.44.6
; v. infr. 3.2 joined with another Adj.,πολλὰ δυστερπῆ κακά A.Ch. 277
, cf. 585 (lyr.), etc.: more freq. joined to another Adj. by καί, πολέες τε καὶ ἐσθλοί many men and good, Il.6.452, etc.;πολέες τε καὶ ἄλκιμοι 21.586
;πολλὰ καὶ ἐσθλά Od.2.312
; παλαιά τε πολλά τε ib. 188;ἄκοσμά τε π. τε Il.2.213
;πολλαί γε.. καὶ ἄλλαι Hes.Th. 363
;π. τε καὶ κακά Hdt.4.167
, etc.;π. κἀγαθά Ar.Th. 351
(butπ. ἀγαθά IG12.76.45
);π. καὶ ἀνόσια Pl.R. 416e
;π. καὶ μακάρια Id.Plt. 269d
;π. καὶ πονηρά X.Mem.2.9.6
;πολλά τε καὶ δεινά Id.An.5.5.8
;μεγάλα καὶ π. D.36.22
; π. καὶ καλοὺς (s.v.l.) κινδύνους, π. καὶ καλὰ παραδείγματα, Din.1.109.3 with the Art. (in Hom. without the Art., Il.2.483, 5.334, 22.28), of persons or things well known, Ἑλένα μία τὰς πολλάς, τὰς πάνυ π. ψυχὰς ὀλέσασ' those many lives, A.Ag. 1456 (lyr.), cf. S.OT 845, Th.3.87, Pl.Phd. 88a, Ti. 54a, Act.Ap.26.24: with abstract Nouns,τᾶς πολλᾶς ὑγιείας A. Ag. 1001
(lyr., dub.); numbers,Hdt.
1.136.b οἱ π. the many, i.e. the greater number,Ἀθηναῖοι.. ἀπῆλθον οἱ πολλοί Th. 1.126
, cf. 3.32, etc. (so in sg., ὁ πολλὸς λόγος the prevailing report, Hdt.1.75);τοῖς π. κριταῖς S.Aj. 1243
: with gen., τοῖς π. βροτῶν ib. 682;οἱ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων X.Cyr.8.2.24
; far the most,Hp.
Aër.20 (v.l. μάλιστα for ἅπαντες); for τὰ πολλὰ πάντα, v. infr. 111.1a: hence οἱ πολλοί the people, the commonalty, opp. οἱ μείζω κεκτημένοι, Th.1.6; opp. οἱ κομψότεροι, Pl.R. 505b; οἱ π., = Lat. plebs, D.S.20.36; τῶν πολλῶν εἷς one of the multitude, D.21.96; alsoὁ π. λεώς Luc.JTr.53
, cf. Rh.Pr.17;ὁ π. ὅμιλος Id.Luct.2
. Hdn.1.1.1, etc.;ὁ π. δῆμος Luc.Apol.15
;ὁ π. ὄχλος Ph. 2.4
; ὁ π. alone, = vulgus, v.l. in D.S.2.29; the ordinary man, Epicur.Fr. 478, Phld.Rh.2.154S.;νίμμα ὁ π. λέγει, ἡμεῖς ἀπόνιπτρον λέγομεν Phryn.170
, cf.369; ὁ ἐμπαθὴς καὶ π. ἄνθρωπος 'l'homme moyen sensuel', Herm.in Phdr.p.146A.; ὁ π. ἄνθρωπος (with pl. Verb) the average man, opp. τὸ ἐξαίρετον, Eun.Hist.p.216 D.c τὸ πολύ, c. gen.,τῆς στρατιῆς τὸ πολλόν Hdt.8.100
;τὸ π. τοῦ χρόνου Hp.
Aër. 20;τῶν λογάδων τὸ π. Th.5.73
;τῶν ὅπλων τὸ π. Pl.Plt. 288b
; alsoὁ στρατὸς ὁ πολλός Hdt.1.102
;ἡ δύναμις ἡ π. Th.1.24
; ὁ π. βίοτος the best part of life, S.El. 185 (lyr.).d the most,Od.
22.273, and perh. 2.58, 17.537 (elsewh. in Hom. πολλά, as Subst., means much riches, great possessions, Il.11.684, Od.19.195);τὰ π. τοῦ πολέμου Th.2.13
; πρὸς τὸ τῶν π. μέγεθος in regard to the size of the average, Arist.Rh. 1363b11.4 pl. πολλά very much, too much, πολλὰ πράσσειν, = πολυπραγμονεῖν, E.Supp. 576, Ar.Ra. 228;π. ἔπαθεν Pi.O.13.63
, etc.; π. ἔρξαι τινά to do one much harm, A. Th. 923 (lyr.).5 πολλάς with Verbs of beating ( πληγάς being omitted), v. πληγή 1.6 πολύς repeated, , cf. A.Supp. 451; , etc.; πολλοῦ πολύς, v. infr. 111.1b: with Advbs. πολλάκις, πολλαχῇ, etc. (qq. v., cf. 111.1 e).III Adverbial usages:a neut. πολύ ([dialect] Ion. πολλόν) , πολλά, much,πόλλ' ἀεκαζομένη Il.6.458
, etc.; strengthd.,μάλα πολλά 8.22
, al.;πάνυ πολύ Pl.Alc.1.119c
; ; esp. of repetition, often, Il.2.798, Od.13.29, Hes.Op. 322; so of earnest commands and entreaties, πολλὰ κελεύων, πόλλ' ἐπέτελλον, πολλὰ λισσομένη, πολλὰ μάλ' εὐχομένω, Il.5.528, 11.782, 5.358, 9.183: with the Art., for the most part,Pl.
Prt. 315a, etc. (but with numerals, at most, Vett. Val.9.5);ὡς τὸ π. X.Mem.1.1.10
, etc.;τὰ πολλά Th.1.13
, 2.11,87, etc.;ὡς τὰ π. Id.5.65
, etc.;τὰ π. πάντα Hdt.1.203
, 2.35, 5.67.b of Degree, far, very much,ἀπέφυγε πολλὸν τοὺς διώκοντας Id.6.82
: also abs. gen. πολλοῦ very,θρασὺς εἶ πολλοῦ Ar.Nu. 915
, cf. Eup.74;πολλοῦ δύνασθαι Alciphr.1.9
(s.v.l.); πολλοῦ πολύς, πολλὴ πολλοῦ, much too much, Ar.Eq. 822,Ra. 1046.c of Space, a great way, far,οὐ πολλόν Hdt.1.104
;πολὺ οὐκ ἐξῄεσαν Th.1.15
, etc.d of Time, long,ὡς πολλὸν τοῦτο ἐγίνετο Hdt.4.126
, cf. 6.129.e of Probability, ἐὰν πολλὰ πολλῶν τέκῃς, perh. = ἐὰν πολλάκις τέκῃς,POxy. 744.9 (i B.C./i A.D.);ἐάν τι πολλὰ πολλάκις πάθω Ar.Ec. 1105
.2 πολύ is freq. joined with Adjs. and Advbs.,a with a [comp] Comp. to increase its comp. force, πολὺ μεῖζον, πολλὸν παυρότεροι, Il.1.167, Od.14.17; πολὺ μᾶλλον much more, Il.9.700; πολύ τι μᾶλλον f.l. in D.H. Comp.4 (p.22 U.-R.): with words, esp. Preps., between πολύ and its Adj., π. ἐν πλέονι, π. ἐπὶ δεινοτέρῳ, Th.1.35, Pl.R. 589e;πολὺ ἔτι ἐκ λαμπροτέρων Id.Phd. 110c
;π. σὺν φρονήματι μείζονι X.An.3.1.22
, cf.3.2.30, Smp.1.4 (but the Prep. freq. comes first,ἐκ π. ἐλάττονος And.1.109
, etc.); so πολλῷ is freq. used with the [comp] Comp., by far, A.Pr. 337, Hdt. 1.134, etc.;π. μᾶλλον S.OT 1159
, Pl.Phd. 80e; οὐ πολλῷ τεῳ ἀσθενέστερον not a great deal weaker, Hdt.1.181, cf. 2.48,67, etc.: πολύ with all words implying comparison, πολὺ πρίν much sooner, Il.9.250;π. πρό 4.373
: with the comp. Verbφθάνω, ἦ κε πολὺ φθαίη 13.815
; so πολὺ προβέβηκας ἁπάντων, πολὺ προμάχεσθαι ἁπάντων, 6.125, 11.217;προὔλαβε πολλῷ Th.7.80
: with βούλομαι, = prefer,ἡμῖν πολὺ βούλεται ἢ Δαναοῖσι νίκην Il.17.331
, cf. Od.17.404; πολύ γε in answers, after a [comp] Comp. or [comp] Sup., ἀργὸς.. γενήσεται μᾶλλον; Answ. , cf. 387e, etc.b with a [comp] Sup., πολὺ πρώτιστος, πολλὸν ἄριστος, far the first, etc., Il.2.702, 1.91, etc.;προθυμία π. τολμηροτάτη Th.1.74
, etc.;πολλόν τι μάλιστα Hdt.1.56
;π. δή, π. δὴ γυναῖκ' ἀρίσταν E.Alc. 442
(lyr.), cf. Ar.Av. 539, Archestr.Fr.34.9; alsoπολλῷ πλεῖστοι Hdt.5.92
.έ, 8.42;π. μεγίστους Id.4.82
.c with a Positive, to add force to the Adj.,ὦ πολλὰ μὲν τάλαινα, πολλὰ δ' αὖ σοφή A.Ag. 1295
; alsoἐς πόλλ' ἀθλία πέφυκ' ἐγώ E.Ph. 619
(troch.);πολὺ ἀφόρητος Luc.DMeretr. 9.3
; cf. πλεῖστος.IV with Preps.,1 διὰ πολλοῦ at a great interval of Space or Time, v. διά A.1.5, 11.2.4 ἐπὶ πολύ,a over a great space, far,οὐκ ἐπὶ πολλόν Hdt.2.32
; ἐπὶ π. τῆς θαλάσσης, τῆς χώρας, Th.1.50,4.3, etc.; to a great extent, Id.1.6,18,3.83; cf.ποιέω B.11.2
.b for a long time, long, Id.5.16;τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπὶ π. Id.7.38
, cf. 39.cὡς ἐπὶ π.
very generally,Id.
1.12 (v.l.), Archyt. ap. Stob.3.1.195;ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π.
for the most part,Th.
2.13, Pl.Plt. 294e, etc.;μὴ καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον, ἀλλ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Isoc.4.154
;τό γ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Id.8.35
.6 περὶ πολλοῦ, v. supr. 1.3.7 πρὸ πολλοῦ far before,τῆς πόλεως D.H.9.35
; also of Time, οὐ πρὸ π. not long before, Id.5.62.8 σὺν πολλῷ in no small degree, only too much or too well, Hld.2.8,9.20, 10.9 (cf. CR41.53). -
43 ἀπαλλάσσω
A- ξω Isoc.5.52
: [tense] pf.ἀπήλλᾰχα X.Mem. 3.13.6
: [tense] aor.ἀπήλλαξα Hdt.1.16
, Ar.V. 1537, etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf.ἀπήλλαγμαι Id. Pax 1128
, Isoc.5.49, [dialect] Ion.ἀπάλλαγμαι Hdt.2.144
, 167: [tense] aor. ἀπηλλάχθην, [dialect] Ion.ἀπαλλ- Id.2.152
, etc.; in [dialect] Att. ἀπηλλάγην [ᾰ] as always in Prose; also in Trag. (for the most part metri gr., cf. however S.Ant. 422, El. 783 (v.l.), E.Ph. 592 (v.l.), Andr. 592): [tense] fut.ἀπαλλαχθήσομαι Id.Hipp. 356
, Ar.Av. 940; in Prose,ἀπαλλαγήσομαι Th. 4.28
, etc.:—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. (in pass. sense)ἀπαλλάξομαι Hdt.7.122
, E. Hel. 437, Th.8.83, etc.: [tense] aor.ἀπαηλλάξαντο E.Heracl. 317
, cf. Plu. Cat.Mi.64.A. [voice] Act., set free, deliver from a thing,παιδίον δυσμορφίης Hdt. 6.61
; τινὰ πόνων, κακῶν, A.Eu.83, Pr. 773;τινὰ ἐκ γόων S.El. 292
;ἐκ φόβου καὶ κακῶν And.1.59
: c. acc. only, release, S.Ant. 596, etc.;κόπος μ' ἀ. Id.Ph. 880
.2 put away from, remove from, τί τινος, as ἀ. γῆς πρόσωπον, φρενῶν ἔρωτα, E.Med.27, Hipp. 774 (lyr.);σφαγῆς χεῖρα IT 994
;χρυσὸν χερός Hec. 1222
; ἀ. τινά τινος take away or remove from one, Ar.Ec. 1046;τινὰ ἀπὸ τῆς πολιορκίας D.C.43.32
.3 c. acc. only, put away, remove, τι E.Hec. 1068, Pl.Prt. 354d, etc.; μύθοις ἔργ' ἀ. κακά do away ill by words, E.Fr.282.26; get rid of creditors, And. 1.122;τοὺς χρήστας Is.5.28
; get rid of an opponent, by fair means or foul, D.24.37;ἀ. τοὺς κατηγόρους Lys.29.1
;τοὺς Πελοποννησίους ἐκ τῆς χώρας Th.8.48
; dismiss, send away,τινά Id.1.90
; remove or displace from an office, ib. 129;ἀ. τοὺς ὑπηρέτας καὶ θεραπευτῆρας Plu. Lyc.11
; also, make away with, destroy, Thphr.HP9.15.2;ἑαυτόν Plu.Cat.Mi.70
; bring to an end, .4 in Law, give a release, discharge, D.36.25, cf. 37.1;τοὺς δανείσαντας ἀ. 34.22
, cf. PTeb.315.16 (ii A.D.); discharge a debt, D.C.59.1, etc.:—so in [voice] Pass., Id.51.17.II intr., get off free, escape, esp. with an Adv. added, ῥηιδίως, χαλεπῶς ἀ., Hp.VM10,20, cf. X.Cyr.4.1.5;ὁ στόλος οὕτως ἀ.
came off, ended,Hdt.
5.63, cf. A.Ag. 1288, E.Med. 786;οὐκ ὡς ἤθελε ἀπήλλαξεν Hdt.1.16
;κάκιον ἀ. Pl.R. 491d
, cf. Men.Epit. 199;καταγελάστως ἀ. Aeschin.2.38
;ἀλυσιτελῶς ἀ. Thphr.Char.8.11
; ἀλύπως ἀ. get along well, PPetr.3p.58: with part. or Adj., χαίρωνἀ. Hdt.3.69
;ἀθῷοι ἀ. Pl.Sph. 254d
, etc.: c. gen., depart from, (dub.l.); ; soπῶς ἀπήλλαχεν ἐκ τῆς ὁδοῦ; X.Mem.3.13.6
; in respect of..,Diph.
73.B. [voice] Pass. and [voice] Med., to be set free or released from a thing, get rid of it,ἀπαλλαχθέντας δουλοσύνης Hdt.1.170
;τυράννων Id.5.78
;τῶν παρεόντων κακῶν Id.2.120
; ; ; ; ;Κλέωνος Th.4.28
;τῆς κακουχίας ἐπὶ τὴν αὑτοῦ σκηνήν Plb.5.15.6
.2 get off, escape, mostly with some Adj. or Adv. added (as in [voice] Act. 11),ῥηιδίως ἀ. Hp.VM3
;ἀγῶνος ἀ. καλῶς E.Heracl. 346
; ἀζήμιος ἀπαλλαγῆναι, ἀπαλλάττεσθαι, Ar.Pl. 271, Pl.Lg. 721d.3 abs., to be acquitted, D.22.39.4 of a point under discussion, to be dismissed as settled,τοῦτο ἀπήλλακται μὴ.. τὸ φίλον φίλον εἶναι Pl.Ly. 220b
, cf. Phlb. 67a.II remove, depart from, ἐκ τῆς χώρης, ἐξ Αἰγύπτου, Hdt.1.61,2.139, al.;μαντικῶν μυχῶν A.Eu. 180
;γῆς ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι πόδα E.Med. 729
;δόξης, δέους Th.2.42
;ἀ. παρά τινος Aeschin.1.78
; depart, go away,ἐς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ Hdt.1.82
, al.;ἐπὶ τῆς ἑωυτοῦ Id.9.11
, cf. 5.64;πρὸς χώραν Pl.Lg. 938a
: abs., Hdt.2.93, al., Aen. Tact.10.19, 15.9.2 ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι τοῦ βίου depart from life, E.Hel. 102, Hipp. 356;βίου ἀπαλλαγὴν ἀ. Pl.R. 496e
; freq. without τοῦ βίου, depart, die, E.Heracl. 1000, Pl.Phd. 81c, etc.3ἀ. λέχους
to be divorced,E.
Andr. 592;ἀ. γυναῖκά τε ἀπ' ἀνδρὸς καὶ τὸν ἄνδρα ἀπὸ γυναικός Pl.Lg. 868d
.5ἀ. ἐκ παίδων
become a man,Aeschin.
1.40.6 to be removed from, free from the imputation of, ἀπηλλαγμένος εὐηθίης many removes from folly, Hdt.1.60;ξυμφορῶν Th.1.122
;αἰσχύνης Id.3.63
: c. inf., κρῖναι ἱκανῶς οὐκ ἀπήλλακτο was not far from judging adequately, Id.1.138.b πολλὸν ἀπηλλαγμένος τινός far inferior to him, Hdt.2.144.7 depart from, leave off from,τῶν μακρῶν λόγων S.El. 1335
; ;ἀ. λημμάτων
give up the pursuit of..,D.
3.33; οὐκ ἀπήλλακται γραφικῆς is not averse from.., Luc.Salt.35.b abs., have done, cease, of things, S.Ant. 422;ὅταν ἡ μέθη ἀπαλλαγῇ Arist.MM 1202a3
.c throw up one's case, give up a prosecution, D.21.151,198.d c. part., εἰπὼν ἀπαλλάγηθι speak and be done withit, Pl.Grg. 491c, cf.Tht. 183c; ;ἀπαλλάχθητι πυρώσας E. Cyc. 600
: also in part., with a Verb, οὐκοῦν ἀπαλλαχθεὶς ἄπει; make haste and begone, S.Ant. 244.8 to depart from enmity, i.e. to be reconciled, settle a dispute,πρὸς ἀλλήλους Pl.Lg. 915c
: abs., ib. 768c.9 recover from an ailment, Aret.SD1.14.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀπαλλάσσω
-
44 καρδία
καρδία, ας, ἡ (since Hom. [καρδίη, κραδίη]. Rather rare in other wr. in the period of the Gk. Bible [s. Diod S 32, 20; Plut., Mor. p. 30a; 63a; Epict. 1, 27, 21; M. Ant. 2, 3, 3; 7, 13, 3; Ps.-Apollod. 1, 4, 1, 5; Lucian; pap, incl. PGM 5, 157; 13, 263; 833; 1066; s. below 1bη], but common LXX, pseudepigr.; Ar. 15, 3; Just., D. 39, 5; 46, 5 al.; Ath. 31, 3. On Philo and Joseph. s. ASchlatter, D. Theol. d. Judentums nach d. Bericht d. Jos. ’32, 21).① heart as seat of physical, spiritual and mental life (as freq. in Gk. lit.), fig. extension of ‘heart’ as an organ of the body (Il. 13, 282 al.), a mng. not found in our lit.ⓐ as the center and source of physical life (Ps 101:5; 103:15) ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς … τὰς κ. satisfying the hearts w. food Ac 14:17. τρέφειν τὰς κ. fatten the hearts Js 5:5.ⓑ as center and source of the whole inner life, w. its thinking, feeling, and volition (νοῦν κ. φρένας κ. διάνοιαν κ. λογισμὸν εἶπέ τις ποιητὴς [Hes., Fgm. 247 Rz.] ἐν καρδίᾳ περιέχεσθαι=some poet said that the heart embraces perception, wit, intellect, and reflection), of humans whether in their pre-Christian or Christian experienceα. in an all-inclusive sense: said of God’s or Christ’s awareness about the inner life of humans γινώσκειν τὰς καρδίας (cp. 1 Km 16:7; 1 Ch 28:9; s. also Did., Gen. 170, 24) Lk 16:15; δοκιμάζειν 1 Th 2:4; ἐρευνᾶν Ro 8:27; Rv 2:23 (νεφροὺς κ. καρδίας as Ps 7:10; Jer 17:10; 20:12); κριτικὸς ἐνθυμήσεων καὶ ἐννοιῶν καρδίας Hb 4:12; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς κ. 1 Cor 14:25 (cp. TestReub 1:4). Generally, of human attitudes ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς κ. ἄνθρωπος 1 Pt 3:4. ἐκ καρδίας from (the bottom of) the heart=sincerely (Aristoph., Nub. 86) Ro 6:17. Also ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν (M. Ant. 2, 3, 3 ἀπὸ καρδίας εὐχάριστος τ. θεοῖς; Lucian, Jupp. Tr. 19; Is 59:13; La 3:33) Mt 18:35. ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Ti 1:5; 2 Ti 2:22; 1 Pt 1:22. ἐξ ὅλης τ. καρδίας (TestLevi 13:1) Ac 8:37 v.l. Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς κ. ὑμῶν 1 Pt 3:15. Opp. κοιλία Mk 7:19. Opp. πρόσωπον and καρδία externals and inner attitude of heart (cp. 1 Km 16:7 ἄνθρωπος ὄψεται εἰς πρόσωπον, ὁ δὲ θεὸς ὄψεται εἰς καρδίαν) 2 Cor 5:12. The same contrast προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ outwardly, not inwardly 1 Th 2:17. As seat of inner life in contrast to mouth or lips, which either give expression to the inner life or deny it Mt 15:8; Mk 7:6 (both Is 29:13); Mt 15:18; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14); vs. 9f; 2 Cor 6:11. ψάλλοντες (+ ἐν v.l.) τῇ καρδίᾳ Eph 5:19. ᾂδειν ἐν ταῖς κ. Col 3:16.β. of inner awareness (see the ‘poet’ under 1b above; Aesop, Fab. 254P.=232H/134b H-H./184 Ch.; 3 Km 10:2; Job 12:3; 17:4): 2 Cor 4:6; Eph 1:18; 2 Pt 1:19. τῇ κ. συνιέναι understand Mt 13:15b; Ac 28:27b (both Is 6:10). νοεῖν τῇ κ. think J 12:40b. ἐν τῇ κ. λέγειν (Dt 8:17; 9:4; Ps 13:1. Also Aesop Fab. 62 H.=283b 5 H-H./179c Ch. βοῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ alternating w. ταῦτα καθʼ ἑαυτὸν λέγοντος) say to oneself, i.e. think, reflect, without saying anything aloud Mt 24:48; Lk 12:45; Ro 10:6; Rv 18:7; διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:6, 8; Lk 3:15; 5:22; Hv 1, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3. The κ. as the source of διαλογισμοί Mt 15:19; Mk 7:21; Lk 2:35; 9:47. διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Lk 24:38. ἀναβαίνει τι ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν τινός someth. enters someone’s mind=someone thinks of someth. (s. ἀναβαίνω 2) Ac 7:23; 1 Cor 2:9; Hv 3, 7, 2; m 12, 3, 5; Hs 5, 7, 2. Also of memory Hv 3, 7, 6; m 4, 2, 2; 6, 2, 8. θέσθαι ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Lk 1:66. διατηρεῖν ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ Lk 2:51 (cp. TestLevi 6:2). συμβάλλειν vs. 19. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι Mt 9:4. διακρίνειν Hv 1, 2, 2. πάντα τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν καρδίᾳ λαμβάνων taking all my words to heart AcPl Ha 1, 6.—Likew. of a lack of understanding: ἡ ἀσύνετος κ. the senseless mind Ro 1:21; βραδὺς τῇ κ. slow of comprehension Lk 24:25 (cp. Tetr. Iamb. 2, 31a, 6 the mocking words of the fox ὦ ἀνόητε κ. βραδὺ τῇ καρδίᾳ). ἐπαχύνθη ἡ κ. τοῦ λαοῦ Mt 13:15a; Ac 28:27a (both Is 6:10). πωροῦν τὴν κ. J 12:40a; κ. πεπωρωμένη Mk 6:52; 8:17; ἡ πώρωσις τῆς κ. 3:5; Eph 4:18. ἀπατᾶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ Js 1:26; cp. Ro 16:18. κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν κ. κεῖται 2 Cor 3:15 (cp. ἐστί τι ‘κάλλυμα’ ἀγνοίας ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 50, 5).—As the seat of thought, κ. is also the seat of doubt διακρίνεσθαι ἐν τῇ κ. Mk 11:23. διστάζειν Hm 9:5.—The gospel is sown in the heart Mt 13:19 v.l.; Mk 4:15 v.l.; Lk 8:12, 15. God opens the heart Ac 16:14 or the eyes of the heart Eph 1:18; 1 Cl 59:3 to Christian knowledge.γ. of the will and its decisions (Diod S 32, 20) ἕκαστος καθὼς προῄρηται τῇ κ. each of you must give as you have made up your mind 2 Cor 9:7 (NRSV) (cp. TestJos 17:3 ἐπὶ προαιρέσει καρδίας). θέτε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν (s. 1 Km 21:13) make up your minds Lk 21:14; cp. Ac 5:4. πρόθεσις τ. καρδίας 11:23. βάλλειν εἰς τὴν κ. ἵνα put it into someone’s heart to J 13:2. Also διδόναι εἰς τ. κ. (2 Esdr 17:5) w. inf. foll. Rv 17:17, or πληροῦν τὴν κ. w. inf. foll. Ac 5:3. Cp. 1 Cor 4:5; 7:37; 2 Cor 8:16; in citation Hb 3:8, 15; 4:7 (each Ps 94:8) al. πλανᾶσθαι τῇ κ. 3:10. God’s law written in human hearts Ro 2:15; 2 Cor 3:2f. In citation Hb 8:10; 10:16 (both Jer 38:33). Stability in the face of dissident teaching Hb 13:9.δ. of moral decisions, the moral life, of vices and virtues: ἁγνίζειν τὰς κ. Js 4:8; καθαρίζειν τὰς κ. Ac 15:9; Hv 3, 9, 8; w. ἀπό τινος Hm 12, 6, 5; καθαρὸς τῇ κ. pure in heart (Ps 23:4) Mt 5:8; καθαρὰ κ. (Sextus 46b) Hv 4, 2, 5; 5:7; m 2:7 cj.; Hs 7:6. ῥεραντισμένοι τὰς κ. ἀπὸ συνειδήσεως πονηρᾶς with hearts sprinkled clean from a consciousness of guilt Hb 10:22. κ. ἄμεμπτος 1 Th 3:13. ἀμετανόητος Ro 2:5. κ. πονηρὰ ἀπιστίας Hb 3:12; λίθιναι κ. B 6:14 (Ezk 36:26). γεγυμνασμένη πλεονεξίας trained in greediness 2 Pt 2:14 (cp. κ. … ἐπὶ τὸ κακὸν ἔγκειται Did., Gen. 104, 14). Cp. Lk 21:34; Ac 8:21f. περιτομὴ καρδίας (cp. Jer 9:25; Ezk 44:7, 9) Ro 2:29.—B 9:1; 10:12. Cp. Ac 7:51.ε. of the emotions, wishes, desires (Theognis 1, 366; Bacchylides 17, 18): ἐπιθυμίαι τῶν κ. desires of the heart Ro 1:24. ἐπὶ τὴν κ. σου ἀνέβη ἡ ἐπιθυμία τ. πονηρίας Hv 1, 1, 8; cp. Hs 5, 1, 5. ἐνθύμησις m 4, 1, 2; 6, 2, 7. μὴ ἀναβαινέτω σου ἐπὶ τὴν κ. περὶ γυναικός m 4, 1, 1; cp. Hv 1, 2, 4; Mt 5:28.—6:21; 12:34f; Lk 6:45; 12:34; 24:32 (s. καίω 1b); Js 3:14; 5:8. Of joy: ηὐφράνθη ἡ κ. Ac 2:26 (Ps 15:9). χαρήσεται ἡ κ. J 16:22. Of sorrow: ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν τὴν κ. 16:6; λύπη ἐγκάθηται εἰς τὴν κ. grief sits in the heart Hm 10, 3, 3. ἡ κ. ταράσσεται (Job 37:1; Ps 142:4) J 14:1, 27; ὀδύνη τῇ κ. Ro 9:2. συνοχὴ καρδίας anguish of heart 2 Cor 2:4; διαπρίεσθαι ταῖς κ. Ac 7:54; κατανυγῆναι τὴν κ. 2:37; συνθρύπτειν τὴν κ. 21:13. κ. συντετριμμένη a broken heart B 2:10; 1 Cl 18:17b (Ps 50:19). συντετριμμένοι τὴν κ. Lk 4:18 v.l. παρακαλεῖν τὰς κ. Eph 6:22; Col 2:2; 4:8; 2 Th 2:17. Of hope (Ps 111:7) Hm 12, 5, 2. Of repentance ἐξ ὅλης κ. Hv 3, 13, 4; m 5, 1, 7; 12, 6, 1. Of sensitivity about doing what is right (1 Km 24:6; 2 Km 24:10) 1J 3:19, 20, 21 (s. ASkrinjar, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 340–50). Of a wish εὐδοκία τῆς κ. (s. εὐδοκία 3) Ro 10:1. Of a longing for God τὴν κ. ἔχειν πρὸς κύριον Hm 10, 1, 6. ἐπιστρέφεσθαι πρὸς τὸν κύριον ἐξ ὅλης τῆς κ. 12, 6, 2 (cp. 3 Km 8:48). προσέρχεσθαι μετὰ ἀληθινῆς κ. with sincere desire (cp. Is 38:3; TestDan 5:3 ἀλ. κ.) Hb 10:22. Cp. the opposite Ac 7:39.—Also of the wish or desire of God ἀνὴρ κατὰ τὴν κ. (τοῦ θεοῦ) after God’s heart i.e. as God wishes him to be Ac 13:22 (cp. 1 Km 13:14).ζ. esp. also of love (Aristoph., Nub. 86 ἐκ τῆς κ. φιλεῖν; M. Ant. 7, 13, 3 ἀπὸ κ. φιλεῖν τ. ἀνθρώπους) ἀγαπᾶν τινα ἐξ ὅλης τ. καρδίας Mk 12:30, 33; Lk 10:27 (cp. Dt 6:5 and APF 5, 1913, 393 no. 312, 9 ἐκ ψυχῆς κ. καρδίας). ἐν ὅλῃ τ. καρδίᾳ Mt 22:37; ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα Lk 1:17 (Mal 3:23); εἶναι ἐν τῇ κ. have a place in the heart 2 Cor 7:3; ἔχειν τινὰ ἐν τῇ κ. Phil 1:7; Hm 12, 4, 3; Hs 5, 4, 3; cp. m 12, 4, 5; κατευθύνειν τὰς κ. εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Th 3:5.—The opp. κατά τινος ἐν τῇ κ. ἔχειν have someth. against someone Hv 3, 6, 3.η. of disposition (TestJob 48:1 ἀνέλαβεν ἄλλην κ.) διάνοια καρδίας Lk 1:51; ἁπλότης (τ.) καρδίας (TestReub 4:1, Sim 4:5 al.) Eph 6:5; Col 3:22; ἀφελότης καρδίας Ac 2:46. κ. καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32 (cp. Iren. 1, 10, 2 [Harv. I 92, 5]; combination of ψυχή and καρδία as PGM 7, 472; IDefixWünsch 3, 15; Dt 11:18; 1 Km 2:35; 4 Km 23:3 and oft. LXX—on such combinations s. Reader, Polemo p. 260 and cp. Demosth. 18, 220 ῥώμη καὶ τόλμη). πραῢς καὶ ταπεινὸς τῇ κ. Mt 11:29 (cp. TestReub 6:10). ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ βραβευέτω ἐν ταῖς κ. ὑμῶν let the peace of Christ control you Col 3:15; cp. Phil 4:7.θ. The human καρδία as the dwelling-place of heavenly powers and beings (PGM 1, 21 ἔσται τι ἔνθεον ἐν τῇ σῇ κ.): of the Spirit Ro 5:5; 2 Cor 1:22; Gal 4:6; of the Lord Eph 3:17; of the angel of righteousness Hm 6, 2, 3; 5.② interior, center, heart, fig. ext. of 1 (Ezk 27:4, 25; Jon 2:4; Ps 45:3; EpJer 19) τῆς γῆς Mt 12:40.—S., in addition to works on Bibl. anthropology and psychology (πνεῦμα end): HKornfeld, Herz u. Gehirn in altjüd. Auffassung: Jahrb. für jüd. Gesch. u. Lit. 12, 1909, 81–89; ASchlatter, Herz. u. Gehirn im 1. Jahrh.: THaering Festschr. 1918, 86–94; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 216–22 (Paul), tr., Theol. of the NT, KGrobel, ’51, I, 220–27; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 305–33. For OT viewpoints s. RNorth, BRev 11/3, ’95, 33 (lit.)—B. 251. EDNT. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv. -
45 εἰμί
εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.① be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.—There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).② to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.ⓐ gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.ⓑ to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.ⓒ in explanations:α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.③ be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, beⓐ of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.ⓑ involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.ⓒ of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.ⓓ of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).④ to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.⑤ to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.⑥ to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8.— Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.⑦ to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).⑧ to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.⑨ to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.⑩ to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.⑪ as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).ⓐ (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.ⓑ w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).ⓒ w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).ⓓ Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.ⓔ In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.ⓕ to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
46 εἰρήνη
εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ (s. εἰρηνεύω; Hom.+; εἰρ. and related terms are common in astr. texts, e.g. Cat. Cod. Astr. IX/2 p. 173, 21; 175, 10)① a state of concord, peace, harmonyⓐ between governments opp. πόλεμος IEph 13:2. ἐρωτᾷ τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην asks for terms of peace Lk 14:32 (cp. TestJud 9:7 αἰτοῦσιν ἡμᾶς τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην; Anna Comn., Alex. 8, 5 ed. R. II p. 12, 17 τὰ περὶ εἰρήνης ἐρωτῶντες.—It is also poss. to transl. inquires about his health like ἐρωτ. [τὰ] εἰς εἰρήνην=שָׁאַל לְשָׁלוֹם 2 Km 8:10; 11:7; s. HThackeray, JTS 14, 1913, 389–99; Helbing, Kasussyntax 40); ἐν εἰ. εἶναι (Aristot., Mirabilia 119, 842a 2) be in peace, out of danger Lk 11:21. λαμβάνειν τὴν εἰ. ἔκ τινος take peace away fr. someth.=plunge it into a state of war Rv 6:4.—Ac 24:2. Of those who are fighting αἰτεῖσθαι εἰ. ask for peace (Anonym. Alex.-gesch. [II B.C.]: 151 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.) Ac 12:20.ⓑ harmony in personal relationships peace, harmony w. ὁμόνοια (Chrysipp.: Stoic. II 1076; Diod S 16, 60, 3; Dio Chrys. 21 [38], 14; 22 [39], 2; SIG 685, 13 [139 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 4, 50) 1 Cl 60:4; 61:1; 63:2; w. πραΰτης 61:2; opp. ὀργή D 15:3; opp. μάχαιρα Mt 10:34, cp. Lk 12:51. συναλλάσσειν εἰς εἰ. pacify Ac 7:26; σύνδεσμος τῆς εἰ. Eph 4:3. βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης king of peace (as transl. of Salem; cp. Philo, Leg. All. 3, 79) Hb 7:2. Of the Christian community εἰ. ἔχειν have peace, rest (fr. persecution, as Ac 14:2 v.l.; for the phrase s. Diod S 11, 72, 1; cp. Jos., Bell. 2, 401) Ac 9:31; εἰ. βαθεῖα (Ath. 1, 3 [opp. διώκεσθαι]; s. βαθύς 3a) 1 Cl 2:2. ὁδὸς εἰρήνης the way of peace, that leads to peace Ro 3:17 (Ps 13:3; Is 59:8); Lk 1:79. μετʼ εἰρήνης peaceably (Diod S 3, 18, 7; Vi. Aesopi W 97 P. μετʼ εἰρήνης ζῆν; EpJer 2; 1 Esdr 5:2; 1 Macc 12:4, 52 al.; Jos., Ant. 1, 179; 8, 405) Hb 11:31; ποιεῖν εἰ. make peace (Hermocles [IV/III B.C.]: Anth. Lyr. II p. 250, 21 [p. 174, 21 Coll. Alex.=Athen. 6, 253e] πρῶτον μὲν εἰρήνην ποίησον, φίλτατε.—ἐπί τινα Iren. 4, 40, 1 [Harv. II 301, 9]) Ac 14:2 v.l.; Eph 2:15; οἱ ποιοῦντες εἰ. those who make peace Js 3:18. βούλεσθαι εἰ. (Pr 12:20) wish for peace 1 Cl 15:1. διώκειν strive toward peace (w. δικαιοσύνη, πίστις, ἀγάπη) 2 Ti 2:22; Gal 5:22; 1 Cl 22:5 (Ps 33:15). εἰ. διώκειν μετὰ πάντων strive to be at peace w. everyone Hb 12:14 (cp. Epict. 4, 5, 24 εἰ. ἄγεις πρὸς πάντας). τὰ τῆς εἰ. διώκειν strive after peace Ro 14:19; ζητεῖν εἰ. 1 Pt 3:11 (Ps 33:15); cp. 2 Cl 10:2. τὰ πρὸς εἰ. what makes for peace Lk 19:42. W. ἀσφάλεια 1 Th 5:3; w. ἀγάπη B 21:9; 1 Cl 62:2. ἀπέστη ἡ εἰ. peace has disappeared 1 Cl 3:4 (cp. δαίμονας … τὴν εἰ. ταράσσοντας Orig., C. Cels. 8, 73, 29). πρόσωπον εἰρήνης ἔχειν maintain a facade of peace Hv 3, 6, 3; εἰ. ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς have peace within one’s group 3, 5, 1.ⓒ good order opp. ἀκαταστασία 1 Cor 14:33; cp. 7:15, and 1 Cl 20:1, 9ff.② a state of well-being, peaceⓐ corresp. to Hebr. שָׁלוֹם welfare, health (WCaspari, Vorstellung u. Wort ‘Friede’ im AT 1910, esp. p. 128ff) in a farewell greeting: ὑπάγειν ἐν εἰ. go in peace, approx. equiv. to ‘keep well’ Js 2:16; also πορεύεσθαι ἐν εἰ. (Judg 18:6 B; 2 Km 3:21) Ac 16:36; ὑπάγειν εἰς εἰρήνην Mk 5:34; πορεύεσθαι εἰς εἰ. (1 Km 1:17; 20:42; 29:7; Jdth 8:35) Lk 7:50; 8:48. προπέμπειν τινὰ ἐν εἰ. send someone on the way in peace 1 Cor 16:11 (cp. Vi. Aesopi I, 32 p. 297, 1 Eberh. ἐν εἰρήνῃ ἀπέστειλεν [αὐτόν]). ἐν εἰ. μετὰ χαρᾶς ἀναπέμψατε send back in peace w. joy 1 Cl 65:1. ἀπολύειν τινὰ μετὰ εἰρήνης send someone away w. a greeting of peace Ac 15:33 (cp. Gen 26:29; Jos., Ant. 1, 179). In the formula of greeting εἰ. ὑμῖν=שָׁלוֹם לָכֶם (cp. Judg 6:23; 19:20; Da 10:19 Theod.; Tob 12:17) Lk 24:36; J 20:19, 21, 26. εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ peace to this house Lk 10:5; cp. vs. 6 (WKlassen, NTS 27, ’81, 488–506); Mt 10:12 v.l., 13 (on εἰ. ἐπί w. acc. cp. Is 9:7; Ps 84:9). In epistolary closure καὶ ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη peace be w. you AcPlCor 2:40.—A new and characteristic development is the combination of the Greek epistolary greeting χαίρειν with a Hebrew expression in the Pauline and post-Pauline letters χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη (s. χάρις 2c) Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3; Rv 1:4. (χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη) 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; 2J 3. (χάρις καὶ εἰ.—or w. ἔλεος—πληθυνθείη, cp. Da 4:1; 4:37c LXX; 6:26 Theod.) 1 Pt 1:2; 2 Pt 1:2; Jd 2; 1 Cl ins; Pol ins; MPol ins; cp. Gal 6:16; Eph 6:23; 2 Th 3:16; 1 Pt 5:14; 3J 15; ISm 12:2; B 1:1 (χαίρετε ἐν εἰ.); to a degree, mng. 2b also is implied in this expr.ⓑ Since, acc. to the prophets, peace will be an essential characteristic of the messianic kgdm. (εἰ. as summum bonum: Seneca, Ep. 66, 5), Christian thought also freq. regards εἰ. as nearly synonymous w. messianic salvation εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἰ. proclaim peace, i.e. messianic salvation (Is 52:7) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:15 v.l.; Eph 2:17; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς εἰ. 6:15. ἔχειν ἐν Χριστῷ εἰ. J 16:33; ἔχειν εἰ. πρὸς τὸν θεόν have peace w. God Ro 5:1 (on εἰ. πρός τινα cp. Pla., Rep. 5, 465b; X., Hiero 2, 11; Epict. 4, 5, 24; Jos., Ant. 8, 396). ἀφιέναι εἰ. leave peace τινί J 14:27a (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 8, 14, 20); same sense εἰ. διδόναι give or grant peace 14:27b; 2 Th 3:16b (so Is 26:12. Since Thu. 4, 19, 1; 21, 1 εἰ. διδόναι refers to granting of political peace). Hence εἰ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ the peace brought by Christ Col 3:15; εἰ. τοῦ θεοῦ Phil 4:7; ὁ θεὸς τῆς εἰ. (TestDan 5:2) Ro 15:33; 16:20; 2 Cor 13:11; Phil 4:9; 1 Th 5:23; Hb 13:20; ὁ κύριος τῆς εἰ. 2 Th 3:16a; αὐτός (i.e. ὁ Χριστός) ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν Eph 2:14 (cp. POxy 41, 27, where an official is called εἰρήνη πόλεως; sim. ἐπὶ τῆς εἰρήνης PAchm 7, 8; 104.—FCoggan, ET 53, ’42, 242 [peace-offering]; but s. NSnaith, ibid. 325f). ἐπαναδράμωμεν ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς εἰ. σκοπόν let us run toward the goal of peace 1 Cl 19:2.—2 Pt 3:14; (w. ζωή) Ro 8:6; (w. δόξα and τιμή) 2:10; (w. δικαιοσύνη and χαρά.—W. χαρά En 5:9; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 45) 14:17; 15:13; (πίστις, φόβος, ὑπομονή, μακροθυμία) 1 Cl 64:1. παιδεία εἰηρήνης ἡμῶν ἐπʼ αὐτόν 16:5 (Is 53:5). In prayer εἰς ἀγαθὰ ἐν εἰ. 60:3. Also Lk 2:29 and the angelic greeting ἐπὶ γῆς εἰ. peace on earth 2:14 are prob. to be classed here; cp. 19:38.—On peace as a gift of God cp. Epict. 3, 13, 12 εἰρήνη ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ κεκηρυγμένη διὰ τοῦ λόγου (=philosophy); Oenomaus in Eus., PE 5, 26, 5: it is the task of deities to establish and to promote εἰρήνη and φιλία; cp. the boasts of Isis in related terms, IAndrosIsis, Kyme.—HFuchs, Augustin u. d. antike Friedensgedanke 1926, 39–43; 167–223; WNestle, D. Friedensgedanke in d. antiken Welt: Philol. Suppl. 31, ’38; WvanLeeuwen, Eirene in het NT ’40; FBammel, Die Religionen der Welt und der Friede auf Erden ’57; on the word’s history, KBrugmann and BKeil, Εἰρήνη: Ber. d. Sächs. Ges. d. Wiss. 68, 1916 nos. 3 and 4; GKöstner, Εἰρήνη in d. Briefen des hl. Apostels, diss. Rome ’58; WEisenbeis, D. Wurzel שׁלם im AT, Beih. ZAW 113, ’69; RAC VIII 434–505 (lit.).—B. 1376. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv. -
47 ὁρμάω
A : [tense] aor.ὥρμησα Il.6.338
, Pl. Ion 534c; [dialect] Lacon. imper. ὅρμᾱον, i.e. ὅρμαὁν, = ὅρμησον, Ar.Lys. 1247: [tense] pf. :—[voice] Med. and [voice] Pass., Pi.N.1.5, A.Pr. 339, Hdt.1.17, etc.: [dialect] Ep. [tense] impf.ὡρμᾶτο Il.3.142
: [tense] fut.ὁρμήσομαι Hdt.5.34
, X.Cyr.7.1.9,ὁρμηθήσομαι Gal.5.85
: [tense] aor.ὡρμησάμην Il.21.595
, v.l. in Hes.Sc. 127 ([etym.] ἐφ-), never in Prose, exc.ἐξ- X.HG6.5.20
codd.: more freq. in pass. formὡρμήθην Il.5.12
, al., Th.3.98, etc.: [tense] pf.ὥρμημαι S.El.70
, E. El. 340, Th.6.33, etc.: [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3pl. [tense] pf. and [tense] plpf. ὁρμέαται and - έατο (with vv. ll. ὡρμ-) Hdt.5.121, 8.35 ; in Hom. codd. usu. have the augm., but Aristarch. read ὁρμήθησαν in Il.10.359: ([etym.] ὁρμή):A [voice] Act.,I causal, set in motion, urge on, cheer on,τινὰ εἰς πόλεμον Il.6.338
, Th.1.127 ;τινὰ ποτὶ κλέος Pi.O.10(11).21
;τὸ στράτευμα ὁ. ἐπὶ τὰς Ἀθήνας Hdt.8.106
, cf. S.Aj. 174 (lyr.), E.Or. 352 (anap.); , cf. Ion 534c ;[τὰ] ὁρμῶντα [σώματα] Hp.Epid.6.8.7
; (lyr.); ὁ. τινὰ ἐκ χερός tear from one's arms, Id.Hec. 143 (anap.):—[voice] Pass., ὁρμηθεὶς θεοῦ ἄρχετο inspired by the god he began, Od.8.499 ;πρὸς θεῶν ὡρμημένος S.El.70
;ὑπὸ ἔρωτος Pl.Smp. 181d
; ἵπποι.. ὁρμηθέντες ὑπὸ πληγῇσιν ἱμάσθλης urged on by.., Od.13.82.2 with a thing as the object, stir up,πόλεμον 18.376
: c. acc. et inf.,τὰς διόδους τῶν πτερῶν.. ὥρμησε πτεροφυεῖν Pl.Phdr. 255d
:—[voice] Pass., was sped,S.
El. 196 (lyr.).II more freq. intr., start,1 c. inf., ἴρηξ ὃς ὁρμήσῃ διώκειν ὄρνεον ἄλλο starts in chase of.., Il.13.64; ὁσσάκι δ' ὁρμήσειε πυλάων.. ἀντίον ἀΐξασθαι whenever he started to rush for the gates, 22.194 ;ὁσσάκι δ' ὁρμήσειε.. στῆναι ἐναντίβιον 21.265
; ἐξελαύνειν ὁρμῆσαι τὸν στρατόν began to lead out.., Hdt.1.76, cf.7.150 ; eager to..,S.
Ant. 133 (lyr.); .2 c. gen., rush headlong at one,Τρώων Il.4.335
: more freq. with Preps.,ὁ. ἐπί τινα Hes.Sc. 403
, Hdt. 1.1, etc.;πύργωμα Καδμείων ἔπι E.Supp. 1220
;εἴς τινας X.Cyr.7.1.17
;καθ' αὑτούς Id.An.5.7.25
; also ὁ. ἐς μάχην hasten to battle, A.Pers. 394 ; (lyr.) ;εἰς τὸ διώκειν X.An.1.8.25
;ἐπὶ ἁρπαγάς Pl.R. 391d
;ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀθηναίους Th.7.34
; ὥρμασε ([dialect] Dor.) (Chersonesus, ii B. C.): without any sense of hostility, rush, (lyr.);ἐς πατρὸς δόμους Id.Med. 1178
; set out,ἀπὸ [τῆς Οἰνόης] Th.2.19
;ἐς φυγήν Hdt.7.179
, etc.;εἰς τὸ ἐπ' ἐκεῖνα τῆς γῆς Pl.Phd. 112b
;ἐπ' ἄλλον λόγον Antipho 3.4.5
;ἐπὶ τὸ σκοπεῖν X.Mem.3.7.9
; ἐπὶ τραγῳδίαν ὥρμηκε has turned to tragedy, Alex.135.14 ; δηλώσεις.. τὴν φύσιν ἐπὶ τί μάλισθ' ὥρμηκε, i. e. what your natural bent is, ib.8 ;φυσικῶς ἐπὶ τὴν ὀργὴν ὁρμᾶν Phld.Ir.93
W.;πρὸς τὰς πράξεις Id.Mus.p.71
K.;ἐπὶ φιλοσοφίαν Id.Acad.Ind.p.64
M. ;πρὸς τὰς ὀχείας Arist.HA 546a15
: c. acc. cogn.,ὁδόν X.An.3.1.8
;στρατείαν Id.Cyr.8.6.20
.3 abs., start, begin,ὥσπερ ὡρμήσαμεν, ἴωμεν Pl.Prt. 314b
, cf. R. 425c; αἱ μάλιστα ὁρμήσασαι [νῆες] the ships that were hottest in pursuit, Th.8.34.B [voice] Med. and [voice] Pass., like the intr. [voice] Act., A. II:1 c. inf., μὴ φεύγειν ὁρμήσωνται that they put not themselves in motion, set not themselves to flee, Il.8.511 ; soδιώκειν ὁρμήθησαν 10.359
, cf. Od.4.282 ; ὡρμήθη κόρυθα κρατὸς ἀφαρπάξαι he rushed to snatch.., Il.13.188, cf. 182 ; ἦτορ ὡρμᾶτο πτολεμίζειν ἠδὲ μάχεσθαι was eager to.., 21.572 ; μᾶλλον ὅρμητο στρατεύεσθαι was eager to march, Hdt.7.1, cf. 19, al., Th.3.45 ; ὅδε ὁ λόγος ὅρμηται λέγεσθαι this account has begun to be given, Hdt.4.16, cf. 6.86.δ' ( λέγεσθαι is restored for λέγεται in 3.56); but λόγον, τὸν ὅρμητο λέγειν which he purposed to make, Id.5.50.2 the object for or after which one goes is sts. in gen., Il.14.488, 21.595 : a case with a Prep.,ὡρμήθησαν ἐπ' ἀνδράσιν Od.10.214
;ἐπί τινα S.Aj.47
, etc.;εἴς τινα X.Cyr.7.1.9
; μετά τινα after one, Il.17.605 ; soὁ. ἐπὶ τὸ ἱρόν Hdt.8.35
;ἐς πύλας A.Th.31
;πρὸς δόμους E.Hipp. 1152
;ἐπ' ἀλήθειαν Pl.Sph. 228c
;ἐς φυγήν Th.4.14
;πρὸς τίσιν S.OC 1328
;πρὸς τὸ κρατεῖν Pl.R. 581a
;[ἡ ποίησις] πρὸς ἡδονὴν ὥρμηται Id.Grg. 502c
; οἱ περὶ λόγον ἢ παιδείαν ὁρμώμενοι persons keen about.., Vett.Val.199.5 : rarely c. acc. loci,νερτέρας πλάκας S.OC 1576
(lyr.).b the starting-point is expressed byἐκ, ὡρμᾶτ' ἐκ θαλάμοιο Il.3.142
, cf. 9.178, etc. ; or ἀπό, S.Tr. 156, Pl. Phd. 101d, etc.;ἀπὸ φιλοσοφίας Phld.Rh.1.357
S.; or by a form in-θεν, σέθεν.. ὕμνος ὁρμᾶται θέμεν αἶνον Pi.N.1.5
: in historical Prose, ὁρμᾶσθαι ἐκ.. start from, begin from, esp. of the place where one carries on any regular operations, ἐνθεῦτεν ὁρμώμενοι living there and going out from thence to do their daily work, Hdt.1.17 ; of fishers,ἐκ πλοίων ὁρμώμενοι Id.3.98
; of a general, making that place his head-quarters or base of operations, Id.8.133, cf. 5.125, al., Th.1.64, 2.69, al.; ἀπ' ἐλασσόνων ὁρμώμενος setting out, beginning with smaller means, ib.65, cf. 1.144 ; of rivers,ἐκ τῆς Ἴδης ὁ.
rising..,Pl.
Lg. 682b.3 abs., rush, dart, attack, Il.5.12, Od.12.126, al., S.OC 1068 (lyr.); also with ἔγχεϊ, ξιφέεσσι, etc., added, Il. 5.855, 17.530, 13.496, al.b generally, hasten, be eager, , cf. 395 ;ἀλλ' ἥδε.. ὁρμᾶται
comes forth,Id.
Pers. 151 (anap.);τὸ φέγγος ὁρμάσθω πυρός Id.Eu. 1029
; ὕβρις ἀτάρβητα ὁρμᾶται insolence goes fearless forth, S.Aj. 197 (lyr.). -
48 βασιλεία
βασιλεία, ας, ἡ (Heraclit. Fgm. 52; Hdt.+) a term relating to royal administrationⓐ gener. kingship, royal power, royal rule (1 Km 15:28; 20:31; Sir 10:8; Jdth 1:1; Esth 3:6; 1 Macc 1:16 al. LXX; En 98:2; TestJob 33:9; Just., Tat., Ath.; οὐ βασιλείαν ἀλλὰ τυράνιδα Mel., P. 49, 354; Orig.) λαβεῖν ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν obtain royal power (for oneself) Lk 19:12, 15; without dat. Rv 17:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 13, 220); δοῦναί τινι τὴν β. vs. 17; ἔχειν β. ἐπί τινων vs. 18; ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν he gave us royal jurisdiction 1:6; cp. 5:10; royal rule Lk 1:33; 22:29; 23:42 v.l. (ἐν τῇ β. σου in your royal power); Ac 1:6; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7); 1 Cor 15:24 (παραδιδόναι as Diod S 1, 43, 6); B 4:4 (Da 7:24). Ps 95:10 (Justin, A I, 41, 4, D. 73: ὁ κύριος ἐβασίλευσεν ἀπὸ τ. ξύλου) is the basis for β. Ἰησοῦ ἐπὶ ξύλου the rule of Jesus on the cross B 8:5 (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.).—Hb 11:33; 1 Cl 61:1.ⓑ esp. of God’s rule the royal reign of God (usually rendered ‘kingdom of God’, and oft. understood as royal realm but with dilution of the primary component of reigning activity), a chiefly eschatological concept, beginning to appear in the prophets, elaborated in apocalyptic passages (Mi 4:7f; Ps 102:19; 144:11–13; Wsd 6:4; 10:10; Da 3:54; 4:3; cp. SibOr 3:47f.—Diod S 5, 71, 1 Zeus takes over the βασιλεία from Cronus; Sextus 311 κοινωνεῖ βασιλείας θεοῦ σοφὸς ἀνήρ) and taught by Jesus. The expressions vary; β. τοῦ θεοῦ and τῶν οὐρανῶν have essentially the same mng., since Israelites used οὐρανός (-οί) as well as other circumlocutions for θεός (cp. Mt 19:23f; s. Bousset, Rel.3 314f); the latter term may also emphasize the heavenly origin and nature of the reign.—Dalman, Worte 75–119; JWeiss, D. Predigt Jesu v. Reiche Gottes2 1900, 1–35; ESellin, D. isr.-jüd. Heilandserwartung 1909, D. alt. Prophetismus 1912, 136ff; BDuhm, D. kommende RG 1910; SMowinckel, Psalmenstudien II 1922, 146ff; LDürr, Ursprung u. Ausbau d. isr. Heilandserwartung 1925; Bousset, Rel3 1926, 213ff; AvGall, βασιλεία τ. θεοῦ 1926; JWissing, Het begrip van het Koningrijk Gods, diss., Leiden 1927; HGressmann, Der Messias 1929; MBuber, Königtum Gottes ’32; PVolz, D. Eschatologie der jüd. Gemeinde im ntl. Zeitalter ’34; Ltzm., D. Weltheiland 1909; TManson, The Teaching of Jesus ’55, 116–284; SAalen, NTS 8, ’61/62, 215–40 (‘house’ or ‘community’ of God); GLadd, JBL 81, ’62, 230–38 (‘realm’); FNötscher, Vom A. zum NT ’62, 226–30 (ethical).α. β. τῶν οὐρανῶν mostly in Mt: 3:2; 4:17; 5:3, 10, 19f al.; otherw. (Did., Gen. 52, 11; 60, 28) J 3:5 v.l.; AcPl Ha 8, 31.β. β. τοῦ θεοῦ (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 3, 40, 21) Mt 6:33; 12:28; 21:31, 43; Mk 1:15; 4:11, 26, 30 al.; Lk 4:43; 6:20; 7:28; 8:1 al.; Ac 1:3; 8:12; 14:22; 19:8; 28:23, 31; J 3:3, 5; Ro 14:17 (defined as δικαιοσύνη, εἰρήνη, χαρά); 1 Cor 4:20 al.; Ox 1 verso, 7f; Dg 9:1; B 21:1; Pol 2:3; β. θεοῦ 1 Cor 6:10, cp. 9; 15:50; Gal 5:21; Pol 5:3; β. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ Eph 5:5; τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cl 50:3.γ. β. τοῦ πατρός Mt 13:43; 26:29.δ. β. αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου) Mt 13:41; Lk 24:26 v.l.; cp. Col 1:13.ε. β. τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Δαυίδ Mk 11:10, since the Davidic kgdm. is to be reestablished under the Son of David, the Messiah (cp. Is 9:5f; Jer 23:5f).ζ. ἡ β. τοῦ κυρίου B 4:13; ἡ β. αὐτοῦ (=κυρίου) ἡ ἐπουράνιος 2 Ti 4:18; EpilMosq 5; ἡ οὐράνιος β. MPol 22:3; ἡ ἐν οὐρανῷ β. Dg 10:2.η. αἰώνιος β. τοῦ κυρίου (cp. Da 4:3; Just.; CIG II, 2715a, 3 ἐπὶ τῆς τῶν κυρίων Ῥωμαίων αἰωνίου ἀρχῆς, Dssm., B 277f) 2 Pt 1:11; cp. MPol 20:2.—The greatest blessings conceivable are found in the β. Mt 13:44f. The foll. expr. refer to obtaining it = participate in its benefits: ἅψασθαι τῆς β. B 7:11; δέχεσθαι Mk 10:15; διδόναι Lk 12:32; εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν β. Mt 5:20; 7:21; 18:3; 19:23; Mk 10:23ff; Lk 24:26 P75 (first hand); J 3:5; Ac 14:22; Hs 9, 12, 3f (HWindisch, D. Sprüche v. Eingehen in d. Reich Gs: ZNW 27, 1928, 163–92); εἰσήκειν εἰς τὴν β. 2 Cl 11:7; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν β. 9:6; ἑτοιμάζειν Mt 25:34; εὔθετον εἶναι τῇ β. Lk 9:62; εὑρεθῆναι εἰς τὴν β. Hs 9, 13, 2; ζητεῖν Mt 6:33; Lk 12:31; καταξιοῦσθαι τῆς β. 2 Th 1:5; κατοικεῖν ἐν τῇ β. Hs 9, 29, 2; κληρονομεῖν Mt 25:34; 1 Cor 6:9f; 15:50; IPhld 3:3; cp. κληρονόμος τῆς β. Js 2:5; μαθητεύεσθαι τῇ β. Mt 13:52; μεθιστάναι εἰς τὴν β. Col 1:13; φθάνει ἡ β. ἐπί τινα Lk 11:20. The phrase ὁρᾶν τὴν β. see the kgdm.=‘realize the fulfillment of God’s promises to Israel’ occurs Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 3:3; Hs 9, 15, 3. The mysteries of the kgdm. can be revealed to those for whom they are intended Mt 13:11; Mk 4:11; διαγγέλλειν Lk 9:60; διαμαρτυρεῖσθαι Ac 28:23; κηρύσσειν καὶ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι Lk 8:1; sim. 16:16; cp. κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς β. Mt 4:23; 9:35; 24:14; κηρύσσειν τὴν β. Lk 9:2; Ac 28:31; λαλεῖν περὶ τῆς β. Lk 9:11. Keep fr. entering: κλείειν Mt 23:13; cp. κλεῖδες τῆς β. 16:19 (s. κλεῖς 1); αἴρειν ἀπό τινος 21:43.—Spoken of as present Mt 12:28; Lk 11:20, perh. also 17:20f (see s.v. ἐντός). Viewed as future, but close at hand ἤγγικεν ἡ β. Mt 3:2; 10:7; Mk 1:15; Lk 10:9, 11; perh. Mk 1:15; ἐγγύς ἐστιν Lk 21:31; ἔρχεται Mt 6:10; Mk 11:10; Lk 11:2; 17:20; μέλλει ἀναφαίνεσθαι 19:11; προσδέχεσθαι τὴν β. Mk 15:43; ἐκδέχεσθαι τὴν β. 2 Cl 12:1; μέλλει ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 42:3; ἡ μέλλουσα β. 2 Cl 5:5; ἥξει ἡ β. 12:2. Conceived of as a banquet (Billerb. IV 1154ff): ἀνακλιθῆναι ἐν τῇ β. Mt 8:11; sim. 26:29; Mk 14:25; Lk 13:28f; 22:16, 18, 30; cp. the parables 14:15ff; Mt 22:2ff. Participants in it are called υἱοὶ τῆς β. Mt 8:12 (of mere external connection); 13:38. Prerequisite for participation is μετάνοια Mt 4:17; Mk 1:15; the willingness to become like children Mt 18:3f; 19:14; Mk 10:14f; Lk 18:16f. Only uprightness will inherit the β. Mt 5:20. Degrees and grades 5:19; 18:1, 4. The prosperous have difficulty entering 19:23f; Mk 10:23–25; Lk 18:24f (cp. vs. 29), those who persist in sin have no prospects at all Mt 13:24ff, 36ff, 47ff.—Paul thinks of the β. as someth. that effects changes in pers. resulting in righteousness, peace (w. God) and joy Ro 14:17. It manifests itself in deeds, not in words 1 Cor 4:20. Those committed to sin will not inherit it 6:9f; Gal 5:21; Eph 5:5 (cp. 2 Cl 9:6); the latter passages show that for Paul the kgdm. is essentially future, since Christians await the complete victory of the spirit over the flesh. Cp. also 2 Ti 4:1. Flesh and blood will not inherit it, i.e. bodies under the direction of the spirit of Christ are required for entrance 1 Cor 15:50 (JJeremias, NTS 2, ’56, 151–59). None other than God calls people into it 1 Th 2:12.—HJWesterink, Het Koninkrijk Gods bij Pls ’37.—The most important lit. to 1931 in PFeine, Theol. d. NTs7 ’36, 73. Additional lit.: GGloege, Reich Gs u. Kirche im NT 1929; RFrick, D. Gesch. des R.-Gs-Gedankens in d. alten Kirche 1929; EScott, The Kgdm. of God in the NT ’31; H-DWendland, Reichsidee u. Gottesreich ’34; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34 (Eng. tr., The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf, ’43 and ’51); TW I 562–95; WKümmel, D. Eschatologie der Evangelien ’36, Verheissg. u. Erfüllg. ’45 and ’53; JHéring, Le Royaume de Dieu et sa Venue (Jesus, Paul) ’38 and ’59; JTheissing, D. Lehre Jesu v. d. ew. Seligkeit ’40; FGrant, The Gospel of the Kgdm. ’40; JWellhagen, Anden och Riket ’41 (Lk); WMichaelis, D. Herr verzieht nicht d. Verheissung ’42; RLiechtenhan, D. Kommen des RGs nach dem NT ’44; GKnight, From Moses to Paul, ’49, 173–87; WArndt, CTM 21, ’50, 8–29; JBright, The Kgdm. of God: The Biblical Concept and Its Mng. for the Church ’53; RSchnackenburg, Gottes Herrschaft u. Reich,4 ’65, tr. JMurray,2 ’68; ELadd, Jesus and the Kgdm., ’64; NPerrin, The Kgdm. of God in the Teaching of Jesus, ’66; MWolter, NTS 41, ’95, 541–63 [Lk].—OT background: WSchmidt, Königtum Gottes in Ugarit u. Israel, ’61; KBernhardt, D. Problem der altorientalischen Königs-Ideologie im AT, VetusT Suppl. 8, ’61.—Patristics: GLampe, JTS 49, ’48, 58–73.② territory ruled by a king, kingdom (Diod S 4, 68, 4; Appian, Mithrid. 105 §496 ἡ βας. ὅλη=the whole kingdom; OGI 383, 25 [I B.C.]; Ps 67:33; 134:11; Bar 2:4; Tob 1:21; 1 Macc 1:6; 3:27; 2 Macc 9:25; 3 Macc 6:24 al. LXX) Mt 12:25f; 24:7; Mk 3:24; 6:23 (Socrat., Ep. 1, 10 τ. βασιλείας μέρος διδόναι); 13:8; Lk 11:17f; 21:10; αἱ β. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου IRo 6:1. In the account of the temptation Mt 4:8; Lk 4:5 (in a manner very different from Jesus, Alexander [Diod S 17, 51, 2] asks his father, Zeus Ammon, for τὴν ἁπάσης τῆς γῆς ἀρχήν and finds a hearing).—EDNT. DELG s.v. βασιλεύς. M-M. TW. Spicq. Sv. -
49 κατά
κατά [(A)][ κᾰτᾰ], poet. καταί acc. to A.D.Synt.309.28, found in Compds., as καταιβάτης: Prep. with gen. or acc.:—A downwards.A WITH GEN.,I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ' Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ' Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, Il. 22.187, 16.677, Od.14.399;κατ' οὐρανοῦ εἰλήλουθας Il.6.128
; καθ' ἵππων ἀΐξαντε ib. 232;δάκρυα.. κ. βλεφάρων Χαμάδις ῥέε 17.438
;ἵεις σαυτὸν κ. τοῦ τείχους Ar.V. 355
;ἁλόμενοι κ. τῆς πέτρας X.An.4.2.17
;κ. τῶν πετρῶν ὦσαι Pl.Phdr. 229c
;κ. κρημνῶν ῥιφέντες Id.Lg. 944a
:— for κατ' ἄκρης v. ἄκρα:Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ Theoc.7.82
(but perh. in sense 11.1).1 down upon or over,κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας Il.3.217
; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ' ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, 5.696, cf. 20.321;τὸν δὲ κατ' ὀφθαλμῶν.. νὺξ ἐκάλυψεν 13.580
; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.., Od.8.85; [ κόπρος]κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή 9.330
; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, v. Χείρ; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες Pl.R. 398a;νάρκη μου κ. τῆς Χειρὸς καταχεῖται Ar.V. 713
;κ. τῆς τραπέζης καταπάσας τέφραν Id.Nu. 177
; ξαίνειν κ. τοῦ νώτου πολλὰς [ πληγάς] D.19.197;ἐσκεδασμένοι κ. τῆς Χώρας Plb.1.17.10
;οἱ κ. νώτου πονοῦντες Id.3.19.7
;ῥόπαλον ἤλασα κὰκ κεφαλῆς Theoc.25.256
; κ. κόρρης παίειν, = ἐπὶ κόρρης, Luc.Cat.12, al.b Geom., along, upon, πίπτειν κατ' [ εὐθείας] Archim.Sph.Cyl.1 Def.2; αἱ γωνίαι κ. κύκλων περιφερειῶν ἐνεχθήσονται will move on.., ib.1.23, al., cf. Aristarch.Sam.1.2 down into,νέκταρ στάξε κ. ῥινῶν Il.19.39
; of a dart,κ. γαίης ᾤχετο 13.504
, etc.; ;ψυχὴ κ. Χθονὸς ᾤχετο 23.100
; κ. γᾶς underground, Pi.O.2.59; κατ' ὕδατος under water, Hdt.2.149; [ ποταμὸς]δὺς κ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Phd.
113c, cf. Ti. 25d;κ. γῆς σύμεναι A.Eu. 1007
(anap.); κ. Χθονὸς κρύψαι to bury. S.Ant.24; ὁ κ. γῆς one dead and buried, X.Cyr.4.6.5;οἱ κ. Χθονὸς θεοί A.Pers. 689
, etc.;θεοὶ<οἱ> κ. γᾶς Id.Ch. 475
(lyr.), etc.; so κ. θαλάσσης ἀφανίζεσθαι, καταδεδυκέναι, Hdt.7.6, 235; also βᾶτε κατ' ἀντιθύρων go down by or through.., S.El. 1433.3 later, towards a point, τοξεύειν κ. σκοποῦ to shoot at, Hdn.6.7.8;κατ' ἰχνῶν τινος ὁδεύειν Luc.Rh.Pr.9
.4 of vows or oaths, by,καθ' ἡμῶν ὀμνύναι D.29.26
, cf. 54.38;ἐπιορκήσασα κ. τῶν παίδων Lys.32.13
; esp. of the victims, etc., over which the oath is taken, ὀμνυόντων τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον καθ' ἱερῶν τελείων Foed. ap. Th.5.47, cf. Arist.Ath.29.5, Foed.Delph.Pell.1A9, etc.;κ. τῶν νικητηρίων εὐξάμενοι D.Ep.1.16
; also κατ' ἐξωλείας ὀμνύναι to imprecate destruction on oneself, Id.21.119;κατ' ἐξ. ἐπιορκεῖν Id.57.22
.b to make a vow towards, i.e. make a vow of offering..,κ. Χιλίων εὐχὴν ποιήσασθαι Χιμάρων Ar. Eq. 660
.5 in hostile sense, against, A.Ch. 221, S.Aj. 304, etc.;κ. πάντων φύεσθαι D.18.19
; esp. of judges giving sentence against a person, A.Th. 198, S.Aj. 449, etc.;ψεύδεσθαι κατά τινος Lys.22.7
;λέγειν κατά τινος κακά S.Ph.65
, cf. X.HG1.5.2, etc.; of speeches, [ λόγος] κ. Μειδίου, etc. (opp. πρὸς Λεπτίνην, in reply to L.);δῶρα εἰληφέναι κατά τινος Din.3.6
, cf. 18.6 of Time, for,μισθοῦν κ. εἴκοσι ἐτῶν IG12.94.37
; κ. βίου for life, Tab.Heracl.1.50;κὰπ παντὸς Χρόνοι IG9(2).517.20
([place name] Larissa ) (butκ. παντὸς τοῦ Χρόνου σκέψασθε D. 22.72
falls under 7);κ. παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος ἀείμνηστον Lycurg.7
.7 in respect of, concerning,μὴ κατ' ἀνθρώπων σκόπει μόνον τοῦτο Pl. Phd. 70d
;κ. τῶν ἄλλων τεχνῶν τοιαῦτα εὑρήσομεν Id.Sph. 253b
; οἱ κ. Δημοσθένους ἔπαινοι praises bestowed on D., Aeschin.3.50; ἐρεῖν or λέγειν κατά τινος to say of one, Pl.Ap. 37b, Prt. 323b, etc.;εἰ κ. θηλείας φαίης A.D.Synt.198.10
;εἴπερ ἕν γέ τι ζητεῖς κ. πάντων Pl.Men. 73d
, cf. 74b;ὅπερ εἴρηται καθόλου κ. πασῶν τῶν πολιτειῶν Arist.Pol. 1307b2
; freq. in the Logic of Arist., κατά τινος λέγεσθαι or κατηγορεῖσθαι to be predicated of.., Int.16b10, Cat. 1b10, etc.; καταφῆσαί (or ἀποφῆσαί) τι κατά τινος to affirm (or deny) of.., Metaph. 1007b21; soκ. τινὸς ὑπάρχειν Int. 16b13
: and in Adv. καθόλου (q.v.).B WITH Acc.,I of motion downwards, κ. ῥόον down stream, Od.14.254, Il.12.33; opp. ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμόν, Hdt.2.96; κ. τὸν ποταμόν, κ. τὸ ὑδάτιον, Id.1.194, Pl.Phdr. 229a; κατ' οὖρον ἰέναι, ῥεῖν, down (i.e. with) the wind, A.Th. 690, S.Tr. 468; κ. πνεῦμα, κατ' ἄνεμον ἵστασθαι to leeward, Arist.HA 535a19, 560b13, Dsc.4.153.2 with or without signf. of motion, on, over, throughout a space, freq. in Hom.,καθ' Ἑλλάδα καὶ μέσον Ἄργος Od.1.344
; κατ' Ἀχαΐδα, κ. Τροίην, Il.11.770, 9.329;κατ' ἠερόεντα κέλευθα Od.20.64
; κ. πόντον, κῦμα, ὕλην, Il.4.276, 6.136, 3.151;κ. πτόλιν Od.2.383
; κ. ἄστυ, οἶκον, Il.18.286, 6.56; κ. ὅμιλον, στρατόν, 3.36, 1.229; κ. κλισίας τε νέας τε ib. 487;πόλεμον κάτα δακρυόεντα 17.512
; κ. ὑσμίνην, μόθον, κλόνον, 5.84, 18.159, 16.331;τὸ ὕδωρ κ. τοὺς ταφροὺς ἐχώρει X.Cyr.7.5.16
, etc. (in later Gr.of motion to a place,κ. τὴν Ἰταλίαν Zos.3.1
);καθ' Ἑλλάδα A.Ag. 578
;κ. πτόλιν Id.Th.6
;αἱ σκηναὶ αἱ κ. τὴν ἀγοράν D.18.169
;τὰ κατ' ἀγροὺς Διονύσια Aeschin.1.157
, etc.;κ. τὸ προάστιον Hdt.3.54
;τύμβον κατ' αὐτόν A. Th. 528
, cf. Supp. 869 (lyr.): Geom., at a point, Euc.1.1,al.; τέμνειν [ σφαῖραν] κ. κύκλον in a circle, Archim.Aren.1.17; also, in the region of,οἱ κ. τὸν ἥλιον γινόμενοι ἀστέρες Gem.12.7
: freq. in Hom. in describing the place of a wound, βαλεῖν κ. στῆθος, γαστέρα, etc., Il.11.108, 16.465, al.;νύξε κ. δεξιὸν ὦμον 5.46
;οὔτασε κατ' ἰσχίον 11.339
; so βαλεῖν κατ' ἀσπίδα, κ. ζωστῆρα, 5.537, 615; βέλος κ. καίριον ἦλθεν struck upon a vital part, v.l. in 11.439: metaph.,ἄχος κ. φρένα τύψε 19.125
: generally, κ. φρένα καὶ κατὰ θυμόν in heart and soul, 4.163, al.3 opposite, over against,κ. Σινώπην πόλιν Hdt.1.76
, cf. 2.148, Th.2.30, etc.;ἀνὴρ κατ' ἄνδρα A.Th. 505
;μολὼν.. μοι κ. στόμα Id.Ch. 573
;κατ' ὀφθαλμούς τινος LXX 2 Ki.12.11
;οἱ μὲν Ἀθηναῖοι κ. Λακεδαιμονίους ἐγένοντο X.HG4.2.18
; κατ' Ἀχαιοὺς ἀντετάχθησαν ibid.;ἐν συμποσίῳ.., περίμενε, μέχρις ἂν γένηται κατὰ σέ Epict.Ench. 15
, cf. D.L.7.108.II distributively, of a whole divided into parts, κρῖν' ἄνδρας κ. φῦλα, κ. φρήτρας by tribes, by clans, Il.2.362; κ. σφέας μαχέονται by themselves, separately, ib. 366, cf. Th.4.64;ἐσκήνουν κ. τάξεις X.Cyr.2.1.25
;αὐτὴ καθ' αὑτήν A.Pr. 1013
; κ. κώμας κατοικημένοι in separate villages, Hdt.1.96; κατ' ἑωυτοὺς ἕκαστοι ἐτράποντο each to his own home, Id.5.15; κ. πόλεις ἀποπλεῦσαι, διαλυθῆναι, Th.1.89, 3.1:στρατιὰ κ. ἕνδεκα μέρη κεκοσμημένη Pl.Phdr. 247a
; laterοἱ κατ' ἄνδρα λόγοι PLond.2.259.72
(i A. D.), cf. D.Chr.32.6, etc.;ἡ κατ' οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή PLond.3.904.20
(ii A.D.), etc.; κατ' ἔπος word by word, Ar.Ra. 802; κατ' ὄνομα individually, 3 Ep.Jo.15, etc.; παῖδα κ. κρήνην at each fount a boy, Lyr.Alex.Adesp.37.13, cf. POxy 2108.9 (iii A.D.).2 of Time, καθ' ἡμέραν, κατ' ἦμαρ, day by day, daily, v. ἡμέρα 111; καθ' ἑνιαυτόν, κατ' ἔτος, Test.Epict.6.24, Ev.Luc.2.41, etc.;κ. μῆνα POxy.275.18
(i A.D.).3 of Numbers, by so many at a time, καθ' ἕνα one at a time, individually, Hdt.7.104 (later detailed list,PTeb.
47.34 (ii B.C.), etc.); κ. μίαν τε καὶ δύο by ones and twos, Hdt.4.113; ; ; κ. τὰς πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι μνᾶς πεντακοσίας δραχμὰς εἰσφέρειν to pay 500 drachmae on every 25 minae, D.27.7;κ. διακοσίας καὶ τριακοσίας ὁμοῦ τι τάλαντον διακεχρημένον
in separate sums of and 300 drachmae, Id.27.11; of ships, κ. μίαν (sc. ναῦν) in column, Th.2.90;κ. μίαν ναῦν ἐπιτάττειν Plb.1.26.12
, cf. Th.2.84: Geom., μετρεῖν, μετρεισθαι κατά.. , measure, be measured a certain number of times, Euc.7 Def.8,9,al.; μετρεῖν κ. τὰς ἐν τῷ Β μονάδας as many times as there are units in B, Id.7.16.III of direction towards an object or purpose, πλεῖν κ. πρῆξιν on a business, for or after a matter, Od. 3.72, 9.253; πλάζεσθαι κ. ληΐδα to rove in search of booty, 3.106; κ.ληΐην ἐκπλῶσαι Hdt.2.152
;ἔβη κ. δαῖτα Il.1.424
;ἐπιδημεῖν κατ' ἐμπορίαν IG22.141.32
, cf. Arist.Ath.11.1; κ. Χρέος τινὸς ἐλθεῖν come to seek his help, consult him, Od.11.479, etc.;ἵεται κ. τὴν φωνήν Hdt.2.70
; κ. θέαν ἥκειν to have come for the purpose of seeing, Th.6.31;κ. πλοῦν ἤδη ὤν Id.7.31
;καθ' ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι X.An.3.5.2
; κ. τί; for what purpose? why? Ar.Nu. 239.2 of pursuit,κ. πόδας τινὸς ἐλαύνειν Hdt.9.89
; simply κ. τινά after him, Id.1.84;ἰέναι κ. τοὺς ἄλλους Id.9.53
; κατ' ἴχνος on the track, S.Aj.32, A.Ag. 695 (lyr.);ὥσπερ κατ' ἴχνη κ. τὰ νῦν εἰρημένα ζῆν Pl.Phd. 115b
.3 Geom., in adverbial phrases, κ. κάθετον in the same vertical line, Archim. Quadr.6; κατ' εὐθεῖάν τινι in the same straight line with.., Papp. 58.7.IV of fitness or conformity, in accordance with,κ. θυμόν Il.1.136
; καθ' ἡμέτερον νόον after our liking, 9.108;κ. νόον πρήξωμεν Hdt.4.97
; κ. μοῖραν as is meet and right, Il.1.286; κατ' αἶσαν, κ. κόσμον, 10.445, 472;κ. νόμον Hes.Th. 417
;κὰν νόμον Pi.O.8.78
;κ. τοὺς νόμους IG22.1227.15
; αἰτίαν καθ' ἥντινα for what cause, A.Pr. 228; κατ' ἔχθραν, κ. φθόνον, for (i.e. because of) hatred, envy, Id.Supp. 336, Eu. 686; καθ' ἡδονήν τι δρᾶν, ποιεῖν, do as one pleases, Th. 2.37,53;κ. τὸ ἔχθος τὸ Θεσσαλῶν Hdt.8.30
, cf. 9.38; κ. φιλίαν, κατ' ἔχθος, Th.1.60, 103, etc.; κατ' ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν, ὅτι δέ.. for no other reason but that.., Pl.Phdr. 229d; κ. δύναμιν to the best of one's power, Hdt.3.142, etc. ( κὰδ δ. Hes.Op. 336); κ. τρόπον διοικεῖν arrange suitably, Isoc.2.6,al.; κατ' εὐνοίην with goodwill, Hdt.6.108;κ. τὰ παρηγγελμένα X.An.2.2.8
, etc.; in quotations, according to,κατ' Αἰσχύλον Ar.Th. 134
;κ. Πίνδαρον Pl.Phdr. 227b
, etc.2 in relation to, concerning, τὰ κατ' ἀνθρώπους = τὰ ἀνθρώπινα, A.Eu. 930, 310;τὰ κ. τὸν Τέλλον Hdt.1.31
; τὰ κ. τὴν Κύρου τελευτήν ib. 214; τὰ κ. πόλεμον military matters, Aeschin.1.181; αἱ κ. τὴν πόλιν οἰκονομίαι (opp. αἱ πολεμικαὶ πράξεις ) the management of public affairs, Din. 1.97;τὰ κ. τὰς θυσίας SIG506.7
(Delph., iii B.C.); so τὸ κατ' ὑμέας as far as concerns you, Hdt.7.158; τὸ κατ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, D.18.247; κ. τοῦτο in this respect, Hdt.5.3, etc.; κ. ταὐτά in the same way, Id.2.20; καθ' ὅτι so far as, Th.1.82, etc.3 in Comparisons, corresponding with, after the fashion of, κρομύοιο λοπὸν κ. like the coat of an onion, dub. in Od.19.233;μέλος κ. Φοίνισσαν ἐμπολὰν πέμπεται Pi.P.2.67
; κ. Μιθραδάτην answering to the description of him, Hdt.1.121; τὴν ἰδέαν κ. πνιγέα like an oven in appearance, Ar.Av. 1001; κηδεῦσαι καθ' ἑαυτόν to marry in one's own rank of life, A.Pr. 890;οὐ κατ' ἄνθρωπον φρονεῖν Id.Th. 425
;λέγω κατ' ἄνδρα, μὴ θεόν, σέβειν ἐμέ Id.Ag. 925
; οὐ κατὰ σέ none of your sort, Chionid.1 (but ἵνα προσείπω σε κατὰ σέ to address you in your own style, Pl.Grg. 467c);τὸ κατ' ἐμὲ καὶ οὐ κατ' ἐμέ Arr.Epict.1.28.5
;οὐ κ. τὰς Μειδίου λῃτουργίας D.21.169
;ἡ βασιλεία κ. τὴν ἀριστοκρατίαν ἐστί Arist.Pol. 1310b3
: freq. after a [comp] Comp.,μέζων ἢ κατ' ἀνθρώπων φύσιν Hdt.8.38
, cf. Pl.Ap. 20e, etc.; μείζω ἢ κ. δάκρυα too great for tears, Th.7.75; ἤθεα βαθύτερα ἢ κ. Θρήϊκας morerefined than was common among the Thracians, Hdt.4.95.V by the favour of a god, etc.,κ. δαίμονα Pi.O.9.28
, cf. P.8.68;κ. θεῖον Ar.Eq. 147
codd. (κ. θεὸν Cobet);κ. τύχην τινά D.48.24
.VI of round numbers (v. infr. v11.2), nearly, about,κ. Χίλια ἑξακόσια ἔτεα 1600
years more or less, Hdt.2.145, cf. 6.44, al.; κατ' οὐδέν next to nothing, Pl.Plt. 302b.VII of Time, during or in the course of a period,κ. τὸν πόλεμον Hdt.7.137
; καθ' ἡμέραν, κατ' ἦμαρ, by day, A. Ch. 818, Ag. 668;κατ' εὐφρόνην Id.Pers. 221
; κ. Χειμῶνα, κ. θερείαν, PLille 1r14 (iii B.C.), PTeb.27.60 (ii B.C.).2 about,κ. τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον Χρόνον Hdt.3.131
, etc.;κ. τοὺς θανάτους τῶν βασιλέων Id.6.58
; esp. with names of persons, κ. Ἄμασιν βασιλεύοντα about the time of Amasis, Id.2.134;κ. τὸν κ. Κροῖσον Χρόνον Id.1.67
; οἱ κατ' ἐκεῖνον (sc. τὸν Ἀλκιβιάδην)ὑμέτεροι πρόγονοι D.21.146
(v.l. κατ' ἐκ. τὸν Χρόνον); κ. τοὺς Ἡρακλείδας X.Lac.10.8
; οἱ καθ' ἑαυτοὺς ἄνθρωποι their contemporaries, Id.Mem.3.5.10.3 καθ' ἕτος this year, SIG 284.24 (Erythrae, iv B.C.), OGI458.64 (i B.C./iA.D.), CIG3641b5,38 ([place name] Lampsacus).VIII periphrastically with abstract Subst., κατ' ἡσυχίην, κ. τάχος, = ἡσύχως, ταχέως, Hdt.1.9,7.178; κ. κράτος by force, X.HG2.1.19, etc.; κ. μέρος partially, Arist.Po. 1456a16; individually, severally, Pl.Tht. 157b, Lg. 835a; κ. φύσιν naturally, Hdt. 2.38, Pl.R. 428e; κ. τὴν τέχνην skilfully, Luc.DDeor.20.7; οὔτ' ἐμοὶ λέγειν καθ' ἡδονήν [ ἐστι] it is not pleasant for me to tell you, A.Pr. 263.C Position: κατά may follow both its cases, and is then written with anastr. κάτα, as Il.20.221, etc.; so also in tmesi, when it follows its Verb, 17.91.D abs. as ADV. in all the above senses, esp. like κάτω, downwards, from above, down, freq. in Hom.I downwards, down, as inκαταβαίνω, καταβάλλω, κατάκειμαι, καταπέμπω, καταπίπτω, καταπλέω 1
.III against, in hostile sense (cf. A.11.5), as in καταγιγνώσκω, κατακρίνω, καταψηφίζομαι: more rarely with a Subst., as καταδίκη.IV back, back again, as inκάτειμι, καταπορεύομαι, καταπλέω 11
.V freq. only to strengthen the notion of the simple word, as in κατακόπτω, κατακτείνω, καταφαγεῖν, etc.; also with Substs. and Adjs., as in κατάδηλος, κάτοξος.VI sts. to give a trans. force to an intr. Verb, our be-, as in καταθρηνέω bewail.VII implying waste or consumption, as in καταλειτουργέω, καθιπποτροφέω, καταζευγοτροφέω: and generally in a disparaging sense, as in .F κατά as a Prep. was shortd. in some dialects, esp. in [dialect] Ep., into κάγ, κάδ, κάκ, κάμ, κάν, κάπ, κάρ, κάτ, before γ, δ, κ, μ, ν, π (or φ) , ῥ, τ (or θ), respectively; see these forms in their own places. Mss. and the older Edd. join the Prep. with the following word, as καγγόνυ, καδδέ, κακκεφαλῆς, καππεδίον, καπφάλαρα, καρρόον, καττάδε, καττόν, etc. In compd. Verbs, κατά sts. changes into καβ, καλ, καρ, κατ, before β, λ, ρ, θ, respectively, as κάββαλε, κάλλιπε, καρρέζουσα, κάτθανε; and before στ, σχ, the second syll. sts. disappears, as in καστορνῦσα, κάσχεθε, as also in the [dialect] Dor. forms καβαίνων, κάπετον.------------------------------------κατά [(B)], -
50 τε
τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).A as a Conjunction,I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second,ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
;ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669
;δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491
, cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375;τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8
, cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b;λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13
; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g.ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7
;ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47
; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3;τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11
(iii B.C.);κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494
, cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times,ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530
, cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives, , cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, asἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22
; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., asοὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6
(v.οὔτε 11.4
); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , asοὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67
; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.a τε.. δὲ.. , asκόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359
, cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625;ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80
;διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3
; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.bμὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291
-3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes,τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a
; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c;Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476
; ; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.; , cf. 253, 262, al.;εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5
; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.;ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11
Def.7;πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18
(iii B.C.);χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13
, 61.1, 3.17.7;ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6
, cf. 3.70.4;ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6
, cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.);καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13
, cf. 2.2.17; , cf. 24, al.;ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4
, cf. Gem.16.6;χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19
, cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g. ; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293;ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308
, cf. 327, 338, al.;τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47
;βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35
;ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c
;βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47
; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined, ; ; ; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193;ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24
; ; ; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives,διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168
;ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16
;θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427
;πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42
:—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g.τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249
, and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6,ἄλλως 1.3
.2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep.,σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99
, cf. 1.400, al.; alsoτε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469
, cf. 8.162.3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also inκαὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9
;καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44
;καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68
; v. infr. c. 10.4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80; ; ;τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47
, cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands: ; ;θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379
, cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264; , cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526;ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410
;οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392
;οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464
; , cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322;ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32
;παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218
;αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294
; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307;τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733
-4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83; ;νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71
;κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592
-4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499;νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265
;σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45
, cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied);ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403
, cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons,ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102
;οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86
; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521;μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410
.2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g.Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334
;Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156
;δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395
, cf. Il.17.249.3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:a the principal clause alone contains τε, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218
;ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333
;εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165
-6;ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530
.b the subordinate clause alone contains τε, λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747
;ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207
;ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117
, cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt.,ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221
: it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.c both clauses contain τε, ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508
-9;εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82
-3.4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies,ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115
; , cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105; , cf. 18.485.5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160;ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338
, cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332;κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438
;μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152
: similarly in clauses withοἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422
;οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160
, cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608;ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655
;ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582
;αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252
, cf. 24.294;οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120
;δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238
, cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415;οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293
, cf. 14.464;πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217
;οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223
.7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent,Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259
;Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39
;Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227
, cf. 20.187; ;Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84
: similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects, , cf. 2.669, Od.5.4;Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319
;Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246
;Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493
;τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203
, cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν)ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467
; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary,οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649
;ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187
;τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105
;σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336
;καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357
, cf. 346.8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g.Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85
; , cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ)δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90
, cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305; ; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature,ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142
;ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247
, cf. Od. 6.266;ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521
, cf. Od.14.353.9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it,κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305
, cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined,ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367
.10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life,γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358
; ; , cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358;ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347
.11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535,ὡς εἴ τε 9.314
, 14.254, etc.II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing)Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35
, cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. hasτά πέρ τε 1.74
,ὅκως τε 2.108
codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al.,οἷά τε 1.93
codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionallyἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17
; (ii B.C.);ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3
(iii B.C.); (Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962;ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1
; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which)ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5
;οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28
.C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats,σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13
;ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362
; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) inοὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367
, cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε inἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106
; ; μέν τε in , cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε inοὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204
, cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions,σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90
, cf. Od.19.486; ; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ')ἐᾶν 16.96
(nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ'); δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118
; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him,ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55
;σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119
, 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187;ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169
; .4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference,κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270
; ὥς (= so)τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227
;τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28
; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166;εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83
(s.v.l.);ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317
;νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456
;πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342
;δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466
;ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252
; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ'), τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406
;οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248
;οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730
;οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437
, 21.596, cf. 15.709.5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18;ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203
; (but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259); , cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning, , cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.7 ἐπεί τε = ἐπεί ( when) is rare in Hom.,ἐπεί τ' ἐνόησε Il.12.393
, cf. ἐπείτε.8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.9 inἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276
, it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.10 Rarer and later uses;a also, esp. withἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29
, cf. 17.273, Il.23.483;ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9
, cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.);ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1
(iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.);τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74
(ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word,εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238
, cf. 15.484.c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.D Position of τε:1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317; , cf. 4.505, 7.295; codd., cf. 291 (anap.);ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69
;ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6
(iii B.C.); , cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε, τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41
(lyr.);πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210
; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows,πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
;ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665
; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε. -
51 κύριος
1I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.2II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.① one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).ⓐ of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.ⓑ w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.② one who is in a position of authority, lord, masterⓐ of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.ⓑ of transcendent beingsα. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P72); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P75; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P45 et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.ε. of other transcendent beingsא. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv. -
52 καταβαίνω
καταβαίνω impf. κατέβαινον; fut. καταβήσομαι; 2 aor. κατέβην, impv. κατάβηθι and κατάβα (Diog. L. 2, 41) Mk 15:30 v.l.; pf. καταβέβηκα (Hom.+; gener. ‘go/come down’)① to move downward, come/go/climb down lit.ⓐ of pers.:α. w. indication of the place fr. which one comes or goes down: ἀπό τινος (Pind., N. 6, 51; X., Cyr. 5, 5, 6; Ael. Aristid. 51, 22 K.=27 p. 538 D.: ἀπὸ τ. ὄρους; Gen 38:1; Ex 32:15 ἀπὸ τ. ὄρους; 4 Km 1:16; Na 3:7 v.l.; Ezk 47:1; JosAs 5:11 ἀπὸ τ. ἅρματος; Jos., Ant. 6, 108) Mt 8:1; Mk 9:9 v.l.; ἀπὸ ὀρινῆς GJs 18:1 (pap; 19:1 codd.). Come down fr. a cross (Chariton 4, 3, 6 κατέβαινε τοῦ σταυροῦ, after the command κατάβηθι) Mt 27:40, 42; Mk 15:30, 32. Get out of a boat (cp. Ezk 27:29) Mt 14:29. W. ἔκ τινος: ἐκ τ. ὄρους (Il. 13, 17; X., An. 7, 4, 12; Ex 19:14; 32:1; Dt 9:15; 10:5; Josh 2:23) 17:9; Mk 9:9. ἐντεῦθεν 1 Cl 53:2 (Dt 9:12); GJs 4:2b. Abs., though it is clear fr. the context where the descent is from Mk 13:15 (s. δ); Lk 19:5f; J 5:7; Ac 20:10; 23:10; B 4:8; 14:3 (the two last Ex 32:7, where ἐντεῦθεν is added); MPol 7:2. Of someone on an elevation GJs 1:4; 4:3; 16:2. W. inf. foll. (Gen. 11:5; 43:20; Ex 3:8) Mt 24:17; Lk 17:31. καταβὰς ἔστη 6:17.—Go, return, go back κατέβησαν εὐφραινόμενοι GJs 6:3 they returned (home) with joy. Here the prep. functions as an auxiliary adv. (cp. Gen 43:13; Jer 43:14).β. as in LXX (for יָרַד 3 Km 22:2; 4 Km 8:29; 10:13 al.) of going away fr. Jerusalem or Palestine: ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων Mk 3:22; Lk 10:30 (cp. 1 Macc 16:14); Ac 25:7; cp. Lk 10:31; Ac 24:1, 22. Of the temple GJs 5:1 s. under δ. W. geograph. reff. in general (oft. LXX; TestSim 4:3 εἰς Αἴγυπτον; Jos., Vi. 68 εἰς Τιβεριάδα) εἰς Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:15 (also κ. ἐκεῖ Did., Gen. 227, 5). εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 18:22.—14:25; 16:8; 25:6; Lk 2:51; J 2:12. Abs. J 4:47, 49, 51; Ac 8:15; 10:20.γ. of coming down fr. heaven (Maximus Tyr. 11, 12e κ. ἐκ τ. θεοῦ μέχρι γῆς) ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Diogenes, Ep. 38, 1; Da 4:13, 23 Theod.; Philo, Migr. Abr. 185; Ar. 15, 1) J 6:38; 1 Th 4:16. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ (Chariton 6, 3, 4 τὶς ἐξ οὐρ. καταβέβηκε. Of things Dt 28:24; 4 Km 1:10) Mt 28:2; J 3:13 (for the contrast ἀναβαίνω εἰς τ. οὐρ. … καταβαίνω cp. Pr 30:4; PGM 4, 546f; cp. Iren. 1, 9, 3 [Harv. I 84, 5]); 6:33, 41f, 50f, 58; Rv 10:1; 18:1; 20:1. Abs. (Aristob. in Eus., PE 8, 10, 13 [=Holladay p. 144 ln. 94]; PGM 4, 3024; 36, 299; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 3, 2; Did., Gen. 110, 17) Ac 7:34 (Ex 3:8); J 1:51; Eph 4:10.δ. w. indication of the place to which one goes or comes down εἰς τ. οἰκίαν Mk 13:15 v.l. (cp. α above). εἰς τὸν παράδεισον αὐτῆς in her garden GJs 2:4; εἰς τὴν ἄβυσσον Ro 10:7. εἰς ᾅδου (Ar. 11, 3; Diod S 4, 25, 4 and Artem. 2, 55 with ἀναβαίνειν ἐξ ᾅδου) 1 Cl 51:4 (Num 16:30; Ps 54:16). εἰς τὰ κατώτερα μέρη τῆς γῆς (s. κατώτερος) Eph 4:9. Esp. of baptism κ. εἰς (τὸ) ὕδωρ go down into the water Ac 8:38; B 11:8, 11; Hm 4, 3, 1; Hs 9, 16, 4 and 6a; cp. 6b. εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ (from the temple) home(ward) Lk 18:14; sim. ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ … καὶ ἥκει ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ GJs 5:1; cp. 8:1. ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν (X., Ages. 1, 18; cp. Gen 24:16, 45) J 6:16. ἐπὶ τὸν λιμένα AcPl Ha 5, 15; πρὸς τοὺς ἄνδρας (cp. 1 Km 10:8; 4 Km 1:15; 1 Macc 10:71) Ac 10:21; cp. 14:11 θεοὶ … κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς. ἄγγελος … κυρίου κατέβη πρὸς Ἰωακείμ GJs 4:2a. ἄγγελος κατέβαινεν ἐν τ. κολυμβήθρᾳ into the pool J 5:4 (cp. Judg 7:9f B κ. ἐν τ. παρεμβολῇ). Of the descent of the devil: πρός τινα Rv 12:12 (cp. Philo, Gig. 12 [ψυχαὶ] πρὸς σώματα κατέβησαν).ⓑ of things etc.: a sheet fr. heaven (cp. SibOr 2, 20) come down Ac 10:11; 11:5. Every good gift comes down ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς τῶν φώτων Js 1:17. Of the New Jerusalem κ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ Rv 3:12; 21:2, 10. Of the Holy Spirit at the baptism of Jesus: καταβ. εἰς αὐτόν come down and enter into him Mk 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτόν upon him Mt 3:16; Lk 3:22; J 1:32f. Of rain (cp. Ps 71:6; Is 55:10; Jos., Ant. 2, 343) fall Mt 7:25, 27. Of a storm come down Lk 8:23. Of fire fall down ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 343) 9:54. ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ εἰς τὴν γῆν Rv 13:13. ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ (4 Km 1:10, 14; 2 Macc 2:10) 20:9. Of hail ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐπί τινα fall down fr. heaven upon someone 16:21. Of drops of blood ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν Lk 22:44 (cp. Sir 35:15 δάκρυα ἐπὶ σιαγόνα). Of a road lead away ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλήμ Ac 8:26.② to suffer humiliation, fig. extension of mng. 1 be brought down ἕως ᾅδου (cp. Is 14:11, 15. ἕως as Ps 106:26; ApcEsdr 4:32 p. 29, 9 Tdf.) Mt 11:23; Lk 10:15 (both w. καταβιβασθήσῃ as v.l.; s. καταβιβάζω).—M-M. TW. -
53 γῆ
-ῆς + ἡ N 1 983-572-805-450-344=3154 Gn 1,1.2.10.11(bis)ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν ἁγίαν in the Holy land Zech 2,16; πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν the whole earth, everybody Jdt 10,19;γῆ Ισραηλ (for MT ראלשׂי ארץ) Israel 1 Sm 13,19*Dt 33,28 γῆς corr.? πηγής source for MT עין, cpr. Gn 16,7; 24,13; Jb 38,16; *DnLXX 9,2 τῇ γῇ = יהוה?, πρόσταγμα τῇ γῇ ordinance for the world? corr. πρόσταγμα πιπι (πιπι palaeographic rendition of יהוה, where π = ה, ι = ו/י) for MT יהוה דבר word of the Lord, cpr. λόγος κυρίου DnTh 9,2; *Is 41,24 ἐκ γῆς out of the earth-מארץ for MT מאפע nothing; *Is 63,11 ἐκ τῆς γῆς out of the land for MT ים/מ out of the sea ( sea understood as the North?); *Jer 9,20 εἰς τὴν γῆν ὑμῶν into your land-באדמותינו for MT בארמנותינו into ourpalaces; *Hos 8,1 ὡς γῆ as dust-כעפר for MT פרשׁ ך(אל־חכ) trumpet (to) your (lips); *Hos 13,15 τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ his land-ארצו for MT אוצר treasure; *Zph 2,14 τῆς γῆς land-ַיְאגּ or יְגַּ valley for MT יוֹג peopleCf. WALTERS 1973, 186-188; →NIDNTT; TWNT -
54 πρόσωπον
Aπροσώπατα Od.18.192
, AP5.230 (Maced.), Opp.C.1.419, etc.; dat.προσώπασι Il.7.212
: a masc. nom. πρόσωπος is cited from Pl.Com.250:— face, countenance (cf. μέτωπον), Hom., always in pl., even of a single person, Il.7.212, 18.414, Od.19.361, al. (exc. Il.18.24), and so in Hes. Op. 594 (v.l. -πον), S.Fr.871.6(v.infr.), El. 1277(lyr.), OC 314, X.An. 2.6.11(dub.), AP9.322 (Leon.): sg. in h.Hom.10.2,31.12, and usu. in later writers;π. κλιθὲν προσώπῳ Simon.37.12
;εἰς π. βλέπειν E. Hipp. 280
; ἐς π. τινὸς ἀφικέσθαι come before him, ib. 720;π. πρός τινα στρέφειν Id.Ph. 457
;οὐκ ὄψεσθε τὸ π. μου LXXGe.43.3
, cf. UPZ 70.5 (ii B.C.); κατὰ πρόσωπον in front, facing, Th.1.106, X.Cyr.1.6.43, etc.; τὴν κατὰ π. τῆς ἀντίας φάλαγγος τάξιν ib.6.3.35; κατὰ π. Αἰγύπτου facing, fronting Egypt, LXX Ge.25.18; opp. κατὰ νώτου, Plb. 1.28.9; κατὰ π. ἄγειν, opp. κατὰ κέρας ὑπεραίρειν, Id.11.14.6, etc.; κατὰ π. in person,ἡ κατὰ π. ἔντευξις Plu.Caes.17
; κατὰ π. παραμυθήσασθαι, opp. διὰ τοῦ ψαφίσματος, IG42(1).86.22 (Epid.); soκατὰ πρόσωπα Eudox. Ars11.21
; also πρὸς τὸ π. X.Cyn.10.9; ἐπὶ προσώπου Ἰεριχώ in front of Jericho, LXX De.34.1;ἔρρ' ἐκ προσώπου Herod. 8.59
;ἀπὸ π. τῆς γῆς LXXAm.9.8
; βλέπειν εἰς π. τινός regard his countenance, Ev.Matt.22.16: usu. of the face of man or God, asλειτουργῶν τῷ π. Κυρίου LXX 1 Ki.2.11
; οἱ ἄρτοι τοῦ π., of shewbread, ib.21.6: of the ibis, Hdt.2.76; of dogs,ἀπὸ τῶν π. φαιδραί X.Cyn.4.2
; of horses, Arist.HA 631a5; of deer, ib. 579a2; of fish, Anaxandr. 30,33.16; face of the moon, S.Fr.871.6 (pl.), Plu.2.920b: metaph.,ἀργυρωθεῖσαι πρόσωπα.. ἀοιδαί Pi.I.2.8
.2 front, façade, Id.P.6.14, cf. E. Ion 189 (lyr., pl.); κατὰ π. τοῦ ἱεροῦ, τῆς νεώς, PPetr.3p.2 (iii B.C.), Ach.Tat.3.1,2;τιθέναι τὰς φιάλας ἐπὶ πρόσωπον Asclep.Myrl.
ap.Ath.11.501d.II one's look, countenance, A.Ag. 639, 794 (anap., pl.), Eu. 990 (anap., pl.), etc.; οὐ τὸ σὸν δείσας π. S.OT 448: metaph.,φαίνοισα π. Ἀλάθεια Pi.N.5.17
.2 Astrol., decan considered as the domain of a planet, ἐν ἰδίοις π. Vett.Val.62.21, Paul. Al.C.2.III = προσωπεῖον, mask, D.19.287 (- εῖον is v.l.), Arist. Po. 1449a36, b4, Pr. 958a17, Dsc.3.144 (v.l.), Poll.2.47;π. ὑπάργυρον κατάχρυσον IG12.276.6
, cf. 42(1).102.58,68 (Epid., iv B.C.), Clara Rhodos 6/7.428; ὀθόνινον π. prob. in Pl.Com.142;π. περίθετον Aristomen.5
; of the Roman imagines, Plb.6.53.5; bust or portrait, Sammelb.5221, OGI432.1 (Naksh-i-Rustam, iii A.D.).2 dramatic part, character, Phld.Rh.1.199S., Arr.Epict.1.29.45 and 57; κωφὸν π. Cic.Att.13.19.3; character in a book, τὸ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ὄνομα καὶ π. Plb.8.11.5; τὸ τοῦ Ὀδυσσέως π. Id.12.27.10, cf. Phld.Po.5.32; also ἀστοχεῖν τοῦ π., of an author, Callisth.44J.;ἐπὶ προσχήματι καὶ π. δικαστῶν Ael.Fr. 168
.IV person, Phld.Rh.1.52S. (pl.);ἀδίκως μὴ κρῖνε πρόσωπον Ps.-Phoc.10
; προσώπῳ, οὐ καρδίᾳ in person, in bodily presence, 1 Ep.Thess.2.17, cf. 2 Ep.Cor.5.12; ποιεῖν or πληροῦν τὸ π. τινός to represent a person, PRein.56.30 (iv A.D.), Sammelb. 6000ii 12 (vi A.D.); λαμβάνειν π. τινός admit a person to one's presence,εἰ προσδέξεταί σε, εἰ λήψεται πρόσωπόν σου LXXMa.1.8
; hence, = προσωποληπτεῖν, Ev.Luc.20.21, Ep.Gal.2.6; μὴ ἀποστρέψῃς τὸ π. μου, i.e. do not reject my prayer, LXX 3 Ki.2.20; θαυμάσαι π. ἀσεβοῦς ib.Pr.18.5; ὁ θεὸς ὁ μέγας.., ὅστις οὐ θαυμάζει π. οὐδὲ οὐ μὴ λάβῃ δῶρον ib.De.10.17.3 Gramm., person, D.T.638.4,A.D.Pron.3.12, etc.; γυναικεῖα π. Alex.Trall.2.4 π. πόλεως a feature of the city, of a person, Cic.Fam.15.17.2.5 f.l.in Zeno Stoic.1.23 (cf.Nicol.Prog.p.4 F.).Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πρόσωπον
-
55 ἄγω
Aἄγεσκον Hdt.1.148
, A.R.1.849: [tense] fut.ἄξω Il.1.139
, etc.: thematic [tense] aor. imper.ἄξετε Il.3.105
, inf. ἀξέμεναι, -έμεν, Il.23.50, 111: [tense] aor. 2ἤγαγον Il.6.291
, etc., opt.ἀγαγοίην Sapph.159
: [tense] aor. 1 ἦξα rare, , part.ἄξας Batr. 119
, inf. : [tense] pf. (Abu Simbel, vii/ vi B. C.), Plb.3.111.3, ([etym.] προ-) D.19.18, ([etym.] συν-) X.Mem.4.2.8; (Sigeum, iii B.C.), etc., [dialect] Dor.συν-αγάγοχα Test.Epict.3.12
; , J.BJ1.30.1, Alex.Fig.1.11, etc. (also in compds., ([etym.] εἰσ-) Ps.-Philipp. ap. D.18.39, ([etym.] κατ-) Decr.ib.73);ἀγείοχα PTeb.5.193
(ii B. C.), etc.; ἀγέωχα ([etym.] δι-) CIG4897d (Philae, i B. C.), PTeb.5.198 (ii B. C.), etc.: [tense] plpf.ἀγηόχει Plb.30.4.17
:—[voice] Med., [tense] fut.ἄξομαι Hom.
, Hdt., Trag.: them. [tense] aor. 1ἄξοντο Il.8.545
, imper. ἄζεσθε ib. 505: also ἀξάμην ([etym.] ἐσ-) Hdt.5.34, ([etym.] προεσ-) 1.190, 8.20: [tense] aor.2ἠγαγόμην Hom.
, etc., [ per.] 2sg. (Cret.):—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. , ([etym.] προσ-) Th.4.87, etc.; ἄξομαι in pass. sense, A.Ag. 1632, Pl.R. 458d, ([etym.] προσ-) Th.4.115, etc.: [tense] aor. 1ἤχθην X.An.6.3.10
, [dialect] Ion.ἄχθην Hdt.6.30
, part.ἀχθείς Hippon. 9
: [tense] pf. ἦγμαι Hdt 2.158, D.13.15; also in med. sense, v. infr. B.2.I lead, carry, fetch, bring, of living creatures, φέρω being used of things,δῶκε δ' ἄγειν ἑτάροισι.. γυναῖκα, καὶ τρίποδα.. φέρειν Il.23.512
; βοῦν δ' ἀγέτην κεράων by the horns, Od.3.439; ἄ. εἰς or πρὸς τόπον, poet. also c. acc. loci, νόστοι δ' ἐκ πολέμων ἀπόνους (sc. ἄνδρας).. ἆγον οἴκους A.Pers. 863
(lyr.);Ἅιδας.. ἄγει τὰν Ἀχέροντος ἀκτάν S.Ant. 811
(lyr.);ἄ. τινά τινι Od.14.386
;ἵππους ὑφ' ἅρματ' ἄ. 3.476
, cf. A.Pr. 465.b part. ἄγων taking,στῆσε δ' ἄγων Il.2.558
, cf. Od.1.130, S.OC 1342, etc.2 take with one,ἑταίρους Od.10.405
, cf. S.OC 832, etc.; τι Il.15.531, Hdt.1.70; of a wife, A.Pr. 559 (lyr.) (more usu. [voice] Med., q.v.).3 carry off as captives or booty, Il.1.367,9.594, A. Th. 340, etc.;ἄχθη ἀγόμενος παρὰ βασιλέα Hdt.6.30
; ἀγόμενος, i.e. δοῦλος, Archil.155, cf. E.Tr. 140, Pl.Lg. 914e; Δίκην ἄγειν to lead Justice forcibly away, Hes.Op. 220;ἡ ἐπιθυμία ἄγει Arist.EN 1147a34
; of a fowler,φῦλον ὀρνίθων ἀμφιβαλὼν ἄγει S.Ant. 343
: esp. in phrase ἄ. καὶ φέρειν harry, ravage a country, first in Il.5.484 οἷόν κ' ἠὲ φέροιεν Ἀχαιοὶ ἤ κεν ἄγοιεν, cf. 23.512 sq.; freq. in Hdt. and [dialect] Att. Prose:—in [voice] Pass.,ἀγόμεθα, φερόμεθα E.Tr. 1310
, cf. Ar.Nu. 241: more rarely reversed,φέρουσί τε καὶ ἄγουσι Hdt. 1.88
;ἔφερε καὶ ἦγε πάντας Id.3.39
: c. acc. loci,φέρων καὶ ἄγων τὴν Βιθυνίδα X.HG3.2.2
; ib.5; ἄ. alone, ravage, IG9(1).333 ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.): —but φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν sts. means simply bear and carry, bring together, Pl.Phdr. 279c; τὴν ποίησιν φέρειν τε καὶ ἄγειν, i.e. bring it into the state, Id.Lg. 817a, cf. X.Cyr.3.3.2.4 ἄ. εἰς δίκην or δικαστήριον, ἐπὶ τοὺς δικαστάς to carry one before a court of justice, freq. in [dialect] Att.,πρὸς τὴν δίκην ἄ. E.Fr. 1049
;ὑπ' ἐπίγνωσιν ἀχθῆναι PTeb.28.11
(ii B. C.); simply , etc.;ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἄ. X.An.1.6.10
, etc.:—[voice] Pass.,ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε Ev.Matt.10.18
, cf. PTeb.331.16 (ii A.D.);φόνου ἄγεσθαι Plu.2.309e
.b [voice] Pass., to be confiscated, τὰ κτήνη ἀχθήσεται πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια (to meet the rent) PTeb.27.75 (ii B. C.).5 of ships, carry as cargo, import, [ οἶνον]νῆες ἄγουσι Il.9.72
, etc.; ἵνα οἱ σὺν φόρτον ἄγοιμι (i.e. σύν οἱ) Od.14.296.6 draw on, bring on,πῆμα τόδ' ἤγαγον Οὐρανίωνες Il.24.547
;Ἰλίω φθοράν A.Ag. 406
(lyr.);τερμίαν ἁμέραν S.Ant. 1330
(lyr.); ; ; .II lead towards a point, lead on,τὸν δ' ἄγε μοῖρα κακὴ θανάτοιο τέλοσδε Il.13.602
;κῆρες ἄγον θανάτοιο 2.834
;οἷ μ' ἀτιμίας ἄγεις S.El. 1035
: also c. inf., ἄγει θανεῖν leads to death, E.Hec.43: c. acc. cogn.,ἄγομαι τάνδ' ἑτοίμαν ὁδόν S.Ant. 877
(lyr.); ὁδὸς ἄγει the road leads, Heraclit.71, S.OT 734, Tab.Heracl.1.16, etc.: metaph., tend,ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον Pl.Lg. 701e
.2 lead, guide, esp. in war,λαόν Il.10.79
; ἄ. στρατιάν, ναῦς, etc., Th.7.12, 8.59, etc., cf. X.An.4.8.12; henceabs., march,θᾶσσον ὁ Νικίας ἦγε Th.7.81
, cf. X.HG4.2.19, etc.: simply, go,ἄγωμεν Ev.Marc. 1.38
; of the gods, etc., guide, Pi., Hdt., etc.;ἐπ' ἀρετήν E.Fr. 672
;διὰ πόνων ἄγειν τινά Id.IT 988
.3 manage,νόῳ πλοῦτον Pi.P.6.47
;πολιτείαν Th.1.127
; τὴν σοφίαν conduct philosophical inquiry, Pl.Tht. 172b; of reasoning,ἀγαγεῖν τοὺς λόγους Arist.APr. 47a21
; εἰς τὸ ἀδύνατον ἄ. ib. 27a15 (v.l. ἀπάγοντας):—[voice] Pass., to be led, guided, ; .5 bring up, train, educate,ἀγόμενοις ὀρθῶς Pl.Lg. 782d
;ἤχθη τὴν λεγομένην ἀγωγήν Plu.Ages.1
; of animals, train, X.Mem.4.1.3.6 reduce,ἐς βραχὺ τὴν ἀρχήν Hp. VM1
;ἐς τὸ ἥμισυ Id.Mul.1.78
; of propositions,εἰς ῥᾳδιξστέραν κατασκευήν Papp.1076.6
.III draw out in length, τεῖχος ἄ. to draw a line of wall, Th.6.99;μέλαθρον εἰς ὀρόφους AP9.649
(Maced.);ὄγμον ἄ. Theoc.10.2
; ἄ. γραμμάς to draw lines, Arist.Top. 101a16; ἤχθωσαν κάθετοι let perpendiculars be drawn, Mete. 373a11; ἄ. ἐπίπεδον describe a plane, Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.7, etc.:—[voice] Pass.,ἦκται ἡ διῶρυξ Hdt.2.158
, cf. Th.6.100; κόλπου ἀγομένου τῆς γῆς, i.e. when the land forms a bight, Hdt.4.99.IV hold, celebrate, Ἀπατούρια, ὁρτήν, Hdt. 1.147, 183 (more usu. ἀνάγειν); freq. in [dialect] Att.,ἄ. ἀγῶνα IG1.53.33
;θυσίαν, θεωρίαν Isoc.19.10
; ; , cf. LXX To.11.19 ([voice] Pass.);ἐκκλησίαν Plu.Aem.30
:—[voice] Pass.,ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται Act.Ap.19.38
.2 keep, observe a date,ἄ. τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην πάντα τὸν χρόνον Th.5.54
, cf. Men.521;κατὰ σελήνην τὰς ἡμέρας Ar.Nu. 626
; reckon,τοὺς ἐνιαυτοὺς καθ' ἥλιον Gem.8.6
.3 keep, observe,ὀρθὰν ἄγεις ἐφημοσύναν Pi.P. 6.20
;σπονδὰς ἄ. πρός τινας Th.6.7
; , etc.: c. acc., as periphr. for a neut. Verb, σχολὴν ἄγειν, = σχολάζειν, E.Med. 1238, Pl.R. 376d; ἡσυχίαν ἄ., = ἡσυχάξειν, X.An.3.1.14;ἄ. ἀπαστίαν Ar. Nu. 621
; κρύψιν ἄ., of stars betw. setting and rising, Autol.2.9; keep up, sustain, maintain,νεῖκος Pi.P.9.31
; γέλωτ' ἄγειν to keep laughing, S.Aj. 382;ἄ. κτύπον E.Or. 182
(lyr.); with predicate, maintain,ἐλευθέραν ἦγε τὴν Ἑλλάδα D.9.36
.4 of Time, pass,ἀπήμαντον ἄγων βίοτον Pi.O.8.87
; ποίας ἡμέρας δοκεῖς μ' ἄγειν; S.El. 266;ὁ βίος οὑμὸς ἑσπέραν ἄγει Alex.228
, cf. ὥραν ἄγειν to be ripe,τῆς γαστρὸς ὥραν ἀγούσης Philostr.VA2.14
; ὥραν ἦγε θανάτου Chor.p.38B.;τῆς ἡλικίας ἄγον τὸ ἄνθος Id.p.53
B.;τέταρτον ἔτος ἄγων καὶ τριακοστόν Gal.Lib. Propr.1
.V hold account, treat,ἄ. ἀρετὰν οὐκ αἴσχιον φυᾶς Pi.I.7(6).22
; ἐν τιμῇ ἄγειν or ἄγεσθαι, ἐν οὐδεμιῇ μοίρῃ ἄ., περὶ πλείστου ἄ., Hdt.1.134, 2.172, 9.7, etc.; θεοὺς ἄ. to believe in, A.Supp. 924; διὰ τιμῆς ἄ. τινά, etc., Luc. Prom.Es4, etc.;τὸ πρᾶγμ' ἄ... ὡς παρ' οὐδέν S.Ant.34
;τὴν Ἀφροδίτην πρόσθ' ἄ. τοῦ Βακχίου E.Ba. 225
;τιμιώτερον ἄ. τινά Th.8.81
;εὐεργεσίας εἰς ἀχαριστίαν καὶ προπηλακισμὸν ἄ. D.18.316
:—with Adverbs, ;ἐντίμως ἄ. Pl.R. 528c
, etc.:—[voice] Pass., .VI draw down in the scale, hence, weigh, ἄ. μνᾶν, τριακοσίους δαρεικούς, etc., weigh a mina, 300 darics, etc., D.22.76, 24.129, cf. Philippid.9.4, etc.;ἄ. πλέον Arist.Pr. 931b15
;ἄ. σταθμόν Plu.2.96b
.VII on ἄγε, ἄγετε, v.s. vocc.B [voice] Med. ἄγομαι, carry away for oneself,χρυσόν τε καὶ ἄργυρον οἴκαδ' ἄγεσθαι Od.10.35
; take with one, 6.58, E.Heracl. 808, etc.; of a ship's cargo, D.35.20; take to oneself,δῶρον Theoc.1.9
, cf. 11; take upon oneself,ἄγεσθαι ἐς χεῖρας Hdt.1.126
, 4.79.2 ἄγεσθαι γυναῖκα take to oneself a wife, Od.14.211;γυναῖκα ἄ. ἐς τὰ οἰκία Hdt.1.59
, etc.;ἄγεσθαί τινα ἐς δῶμα Hes.Th. 410
; simply ἄ. marry, Hdt.2.47, etc.: [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. ἦγμαι is used in this med. sense, J.AJ14.12.1; of the father, bring home a wife for his son, Od.4.10, Hdt.1.34; of a brother, Od.15.238; of friends of the bridegroom and bride, Od.6.28, Hes.Sc. 274: later in [voice] Pass. of the wife, PGnom. 138 (ii A.D.). -
56 ἄν
ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,Aεἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2
, 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.I WITH INDICATIVE:1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh. . 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said,εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755
, cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c;εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3
.b the protasis is freq. understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), Il.4.421; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), Th.1.11; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, Pl.R. 374d; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), D.18.43.c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.2 with [tense] fut. ind.:a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176;ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80
; so in Lyr.,μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68
, cf. I.6(5).59.b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers,σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140
;οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d
, cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313;οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36
(corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, , al.III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition:ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
;οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b
:—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e;ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116
, cf. D.1.26, al.c with protasis understood:φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269
; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447; , cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time, .d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.e in questions, expressing a wish:τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100
, cf.A.Ag. 1448;πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389
: hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, ; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis: , cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag.,θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186
;τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605
.h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part.,τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b
) representing ind. or opt.:1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.b representing [tense] pres. opt., πόλλ' ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ' ἄν)ἕτερ' εἰπεῖν παραλείπω D. 18.258
, cf. X.An.2.3.18: with Art., .2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional, (codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk.,νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8
, cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, onceεἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288
, twiceεἴπερ ἄν 5.224
, 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε (ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep.,σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32
;ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359
;ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824
;ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e
; (where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc.ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156
( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc.εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597
),εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353
; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as inὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81
.2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15;ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6
:—similarly after a preceding opt.,οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
.III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.:αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213
:—so with relat.,οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175
.2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom.,εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526
; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, asὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56
;ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136
(iv A. D.);ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19
; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119;εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295
; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71;διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b
: inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.D GENERAL REMARKS:I POSITION OF ἄν.1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; asεἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281
-4; rarely by τις, asὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14
:—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, asεἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355
, cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose,ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45
;ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420
: alsoὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e
, cf. 850a; .2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25;οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2
; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48;οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b
;οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12
.4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause,ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax
<*>37.II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words,ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333
, cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15; , cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι), εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935
:—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν)εἰ.. Isoc.10.48
:—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others:πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049
: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.------------------------------------ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl.,ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b
; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50;ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4
: not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.------------------------------------ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.------------------------------------ -
57 μεταβολή
μεταβολ-ή, ἡ,2 exchange, barter, ἐπὶ μεταβολῇ with a view to traffic, Th.6.31: metaph.,οὔ τιν' ἀπαλλαγὴν τῶν κακῶν ἀλλὰ μ. μειζόνων Epicur.Fr. 479
.4 payment by transfer in an account, PLond.3.1129b7 (ii A. D.).II (from [voice] Med.) transition, change, ἀρχὰ κινήσιος καὶ μεταβολᾶς [Philol.] 21, cf. Chrysipp.Stoic.2.160;μετάστασις καὶ μ. D.2.13
;ἐκ μεταβολῆς Men.712
, Plb.1.61.7, D.S.13.24;πάλιν ἐκ μ. Aeschin. 2.9
: freq. in pl., changes, vicissitudes,τῶν ὡρέων Hdt.2.77
, cf. Arist.HA 596b23; ;αἱ μ. κάτω τε καὶ ἄνω γιγνόμεναι Pl.Phlb. 43b
, cf. Antipho 2.4.9;αἱ πλεῖσται μ. μάλιστα τέρπουσιν Hp.Vict.1.18
;ἦμαρ <ἕν> τοι μ. πολλὰς ἔχει E.Fr. 549
;τῆς γῆς ἡ ἀρίστη αἰεὶ τὰς μ. τῶν οἰκητόρων εἶχεν Th.1.2
: c. gen. objecti, change from a thing,μεταβολὰ κακῶν E.HF 735
; rarely, change to..,ἀπραγμοσύνης μ. Th.6.18
: more freq. with Preps.,μ. ἐκ φιλοτίμου εἰς φιλοχρήματον Pl.R. 553d
; ἐκ προστάτου ἐπὶ τύραννον ib. 565d;ἐκ τοῦ εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ μὴ εἶναι Id.Prm. 162c
;ἡ ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον μ. Diph.104
; ἡ ἐναντία μ. change to the contrary, Th.2.43; ἅμα τῇ μ. τῇ ἐς Ἕλληνας their going over to the Greeks, Hdt.1.57;ἡ πρὸς Ῥωμαίους μ. Plb.9.26.2
;μ. μεταβάλλειν Pl.R. 404a
, Arist.Po. 1449a14: prov.,μ. πάντων γλυκύ E.Or. 234
, cf. Arist.Rh. 1371a28, Antiph.207.5.4 migration, [τὰ ζῷα] ποιούμενα τὰς μ. Arist. HA 597a3
: euphemism for death, Philostr.VA8.31, Corp.Herm.11.15,12.6.5 as Military term, wheeling about, being a doubleκλίσις, ἡ εἰς τοὔπισθεν μ. Plb.18.30.4
.6 of literary style, variety, Caecil.Calact. ap. Quint.9.3.38;μ. καὶ ποικίλον D.H.Pomp.3
: pl., Longin.5, 23.1.7 in Music, modulation, e.g. of τόνος or γένος, Aristox.Harm.p.38 M., Cleonid.Harm.13, Bacch.Harm.50, Aristid. Quint.1.11, Ptol.Harm.2.6.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μεταβολή
-
58 πρόσωπον
πρόσωπον, ου, τό (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.).ⓐ lit. face, countenance Mt 6:16f; 17:2; Mk 14:65; Lk 9:29 (s. εἶδος 1); Ac 6:15ab (Chariton 2, 2, 2 θαυμάζουσαι τὸ πρόσωπον ὡς θεῖον; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 80 Πρόκλος ἐθαύμαζε τὸ Ἰσιδώρου πρόσωπον, ὡς ἔνθεον ἦν; Marinus, Vi. Procli 23); 2 Cor 3:7 twice, 13 (JMorgenstern, Moses with the Shining Face: HUCA 2, 1925, 1–28); cp. vs. 18; 4:6; but in the last two passages there is a transition from the face of Moses to a symbolic use of πρ. (s. 1bβג below); Rv 4:7; 9:7ab; 10:1; IEph 15:3 (cp. 1bβו); MPol 12:1; Hv 3, 10, 1; B 5:14; GJs 17:2; 18:2 (codd.). ἐμβριθεῖ τῷ πρ. MPol 9:2 (s. ἐμβριθής). ποίῳ προσώπῳ GJs 13:1b. πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ the face he was born with Js 1:23 (γένεσις 2a). ἐμπτύειν εἰς τὸ πρ. τινος spit in someone’s face (s. ἐμπτύω) Mt 26:67. εἰς πρ. δέρειν τινά strike someone in the face 2 Cor 11:20. τύπτειν τὸ πρ. GJs 13:1a. συνέπεσεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ his face fell or became distorted 1 Cl 4:3; cp. vs. 4 (Gen 4:6 and 5; JosAs 13:8). πίπτειν ἐπὶ (τὸ; the art. is usu. lacking; B-D-F §255, 4; 259, 1; cp. Rob. 792) πρ. αὐτοῦ fall on one’s face as a sign of devotion (=נָפַל עַל פָּנָיו; cp. Gen 17:3; Ruth 2:10; TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 16 [Stone p. 20]; JosAs 14:4 al.; ApcSed 14:2) Mt 17:6; 26:39; Rv 7:11; 11:16. Without αὐτοῦ (Gen 17:17; Num 14:5; Jos., Ant. 10, 11) Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25.ⓑ personal presence or relational circumstance, fig.α. in all kinds of imagery which, in large part, represent OT usage, and in which the face is oft. to be taken as the seat of the faculty of seeing. Βλέπειν πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον to see face to face 1 Cor 13:12 (cp. Gen 32:31 [Jos., Ant. 1, 334 θεοῦ πρόσωπον]; Judg 6:22. See HRiesenfeld, ConNeot 5, ’41, 19; 21f [abstracts of four articles]). κλίνειν τὸ πρ. εἰς τὴν γῆν Lk 24:5 (κλίνω 1). πρ. κυρίου ἐπὶ ποιοῦντας κακά 1 Pt 3:12; 1 Cl 22:6 (both Ps 33:17). ἐπίφανον τὸ πρ. σου ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς (ἐπιφαίνω 1) 60:3 (s. Num 6:25). ἐμφανισθῆναι τῷ προσώπῳ τοῦ θεοῦ (ἐμφανίζω 1) Hb 9:24. βλέπειν τὸ πρ. τινος, i.e. of God (βλέπω 1a, ὁράω A1c and s. JBoehmer, Gottes Angesicht: BFCT 12, 1908, 321–47; EGulin, D. Antlitz Jahwes im AT: Annal. Acad. Scient. Fenn. 17, 3, 1923; FNötscher, ‘Das Anges. Gottes schauen’ nach bibl. u. babylon. Auffassung 1924) Mt 18:10; cp. Rv 22:4. ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν or θεωρεῖν τὸ πρ. τινος see someone’s face, i.e. see someone (present) in person (UPZ 70, 5 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἄν με ἶδες τὸ πρόσωπον. See Gen 32:21; 43:3, 5; 46:30 al.) Ac 20:25, 38; 1 Th 2:17b; 3:10; IRo 1:1; s. IPol 1:1. τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί Col 2:1. τῷ προσώπῳ ἀγνοούμενος unknown by face, i.e. personally Gal 1:22 (ἀγνοέω 1b). ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφʼ ὑμῶν προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ (dat. of specification) orphaned by separation from you in person, not in heart (or outwardly, not inwardly) 1 Th 2:17a. ἐκζητεῖν τὰ πρόσωπα τῶν ἁγίων (ἐκζητέω 1) B 19:10; D 4:2. ἀποστρέφειν τὸ πρ. ἀπό τινος (ἀποστρέφω 1) 1 Cl 18:9 (Ps 50:11); 16:3 (Is 53:3). στερεῖν τοῦ προσώπου τινός B 13:4 (Gen 48:11).—τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν (s. στηρίζω 2 and cp. SAntoniades, Neotestamentica: Neophilologus 14, 1929, 129–35) Lk 9:51. τὸ πρ. αὐτοῦ ἦν πορευόμενον εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ his face was set toward Jerusalem vs. 53 (cp. 2 Km 17:11).—θαυμάζειν πρόσωπον flatter Jd 16 (PsSol 2:18; s. also θαυμάζω 1bα). λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον (=נָשָׂא פָנִים; cp. Sir 4:22; 35:13; 1 Esdr 4:39; s. Thackeray p. 43f; B-D-F p. 3, note 5; Rob. 94) show partiality or favoritism Lk 20:21; B 19:4; D 4:3. λαμβ. πρόσωπόν τινος (cp. Mal 1:8) Gal 2:6. S. PKatz, Kratylos 5, ’60, 161.β. governed by prepositions, in usages where πρ. in many cases requires a dynamic equivalentא. ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός from the presence of someone (JosAs 28:10; Just., A I, 36, 1; s. Vi. Aesopi W 104 v.l. p. 188 last line P. ἐπιστολὴ ὡς ἐκ προσώπου τοῦ Αἰσώπου) Ac 3:20; (away) from someone or someth. (Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 9 Jac. φυγεῖν ἀπὸ προσώπου Κύρου; LXX; PsSol 4:8 al.; Herodas 8, 59 ἔρρʼ ἐκ προσώπου=get out of my sight; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 11 [Stone p. 4] ἐκ προσώπου: here because of the compound ἐξέρχομαι) 5:41; 7:45; 2 Th 1:9; Rv 6:16 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); 12:14; 20:11 (cp. Ex 14:25; Josh 10:11; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34 and oft.) 1 Cl 4:8 (s. ἀποδιδράσκω), 10 (s. the passages cited for Rv 20:11 above); 18:11 (Ps 50:13; ἀπο[ρ]ρίπτω 2); 28:3 (Ps 138:7).ב. εἰς πρόσωπον: (Aesop, Fab. 302 P.= εἰς Ζηνὸς πρόσωπον ἔρχεσθαι=before the face of Zeus) εἰς πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν before (lit. ‘in the face of’) the congregations 2 Cor 8:24. τὰ φαινόμενά σου εἰς πρόσωπον what meets your eye, i.e. the visible world IPol 2:2. βλέπειν εἰς πρόσωπόν τινος Mt 22:16; Mk 12:14 (s. βλέπω 4). To one’s face i.e. when present Hv 3, 6, 3 cj. (cp. POxy 903, 2; BGU 909, 12).ג. ἐν προσώπῳ (Maximus Tyr. 38, 1a) ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ before the face of Christ that looks down with approval 2 Cor 2:10 (cp. Pr 8:30; Sir 35:4), or as the representative of Christ (REB); difft. 4:6 on the face of Christ (s. 1a above).ד. κατὰ πρόσωπον face to face, (present) in person (Polyb. 24, 15, 2; Diod S 19, 46, 2; Plut., Caesar 716 [17, 8]; IMagnMai 93b, 11; IPriene 41, 6; OGI 441, 66 [81 B.C.]; PLond II, 479, 6 p. 256 [III A.D.?]; POxy 1071, 1) B 15:1. (Opp. ἀπών) 2 Cor 10:1. Παῦλος, ὸ̔ς γενόμενος ἐν ὑμῖν κατὰ πρόσωπον Pol 3:2. πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους before the accused meets his accusers face to face Ac 25:16, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην I opposed him to his face Gal 2:11 (cp. Diod S 40, 5a of an accusation κατὰ πρόσωπον; 2 Macc 7:6; Jos., Ant. 5, 46; 13, 278).—κατὰ πρόσωπον with partiality, in favoritism B 19:7; D 4:10.—τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον what is before your eyes 2 Cor 10:7.—Used w. the gen. like a prep. (PPetr III, 1 II, 8 κατὰ πρόσωπον τοῦ ἱεροῦ; LXX; Jos., Ant. 3, 144; 9, 8) κατὰ πρ. τινος before or in the presence of someone (Jos., Ant. 11, 235) Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13; 16:9 D; 1 Cl 35:10 (Ps. 49:21).ה. μετὰ προσώπου: πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου Ac 2:28 (Ps 15:11); μετά A 2γ ג.ו. πρὸ προσώπου τινός (LXX; TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 4 [Stone p. 30] πρὸ προσώπου τῆς τραπέζης; GrBar 1:4; s. Johannessohn, Präp. 184–86) before someone Mt 11:10; Mk 1:2; Lk 7:27 (on all three cp. Mal 3:1).—Lk 1:76 v.l. (s. Ex 32:34); 9:52 (s. Ex 23:20); 10:1; 1 Cl 34:3 (s. Is 62:11). IEph 15:3 (cp. 1a).—πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ Ac 13:24 (εἴσοδος 2).② entire bodily presence, person (Polyb. 5, 107, 3; 8, 13, 5; 12, 27, 10; 27, 7, 4; Diod S 37, 12, 1; Plut., Mor. 509b; Epict. 1, 2, 7; Vett. Val. s. index; Just., A I, 36, 2; POxy 1672, 4 [37–41 A.D.] ξένοις προσώποις=to strangers; 237 VII, 34; PRyl 28, 88. Cp. Phryn. p. 379 Lob., also Lob.’s comment p. 380; KPraechter, Philol 63, 1904, 155f) ὀλίγα πρόσωπα a few persons 1 Cl 1:1; ἓν ἢ δύο πρ. 47:6. τὰ προγεγραμμένα πρ. the persons mentioned above IMg 6:1. Here is surely also the place for ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων by many (persons) 2 Cor 1:11 (from Luther to NRSV et al.; ‘face’ is preferred by Heinrici, Plummer et al.—With this expr. cp. Diod S 15, 38, 4 ἐκ τρίτου προσώπου=[claims were raised] by a third ‘party’, i.e. Thebes, against Sparta and Athens).③ the outer surface of someth., face= surface πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς (Gen 2:6; 7:23; 11:4, 8 al.) Lk 21:35; Ac 17:26; B 11:7 (Ps 1:4); and 6:9 prob. belongs here also.④ that which is present in a certain form or character to a viewer, external things, appearance opp. καρδία (1 Km 16:7) 2 Cor 5:12. πρόσωπον εἰρήνης (opp. πονηρίαι … ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις) Hv 3, 6, 3. ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ (i.e. of grass and flowers) Js 1:11. Of the appearance of the sky Mt 16:3; cp. Lk 12:56 (s. Ps 103:30).—SSchlossmann, Persona u. Πρόσωπον im röm. Recht u. christl. Dogma 1906; RHirzel, Die Person; Begriff u. Name derselben im Altertum: SBBayAk 1914, Heft 10; HRheinfelder, Das Wort ‘Persona’; Gesch. seiner Bed. 1928; FAltheim, Persona: ARW 27, 1929, 35–52; RAC I 437–40; BHHW I 93f. B. 216.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
59 βάλλω
Aβαλέω Il. 8.403
, , 1491: [tense] aor. 2 ἔβᾰλον, [dialect] Ion.προ-βάλεσκε Od. 5.331
; later [tense] aor. 1 (5.18); [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. inf.βαλέειν Il.2.414
,al., Hdt.2.111,al., butβαλεῖν Il.13.387
, 14.424; opt. βλείης in Epich.219, part.βλείς Id.176
, as if from ἔβλην (v. συμβάλλω): [tense] pf. βέβληκα: [tense] plpf. ἐβεβλήκειν, [dialect] Ep.βεβλήκειν Il.5.661
:—[voice] Med., [dialect] Ion. [tense] impf.βαλλέσκετο Hdt.9.74
: [tense] fut. βᾰλοῦμαι ([etym.] προ-) Ar.Ra. 201, ([etym.] ἐπι-) Th.6.40, etc., [dialect] Ep. βαλεῦμαι ([etym.] ἀμφι-) Od.22.103: [tense] aor. 2 ἐβᾰλόμην, [dialect] Ion. imper.βαλεῦ Hdt.8.68
.γ, used mostly in compds.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.βληθήσομαι X.HG7.5.11
, ([etym.] δια-) E.Hec. 863; alsoβεβλήσομαι Id.Or. 271
, Hld.2.13, ([etym.] δια-) D.16.2; part.δια-βεβλησόμενος Philostr. VA6.13
([dialect] Ep. [tense] fut. ξυμ-βλήσομαι, v. συμβάλλω): [tense] aor.ἐβλήθην Hdt.1.34
, Th.8.84, etc.: Hom. also has an [dialect] Ep. [tense] aor. [voice] Pass.,ἔβλητο Il.11.675
,ξύμβλητο 14.39
; subj.βλήεται Od.17.472
; opt. βλῇο orβλεῖο Il.13.288
; inf.βλῆσθαι 4.115
; part.βλήμενος 15.495
: [tense] pf. βέβλημαι, [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3pl.βεβλήαται 11.657
(but [ per.] 3sg. h.Ap.20), opt.δια-βεβλῇσθε And.2.24
: [tense] plpf. ἐβεβλήμην ([etym.] περι-) X.HG7.4.22, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Isoc.18.17; [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3pl.περι-εβεβλέατο Hdt.6.25
.—[dialect] Ep. [tense] pf. βεβόλημαι in special sense, v. βολέω.A [voice] Act., throw:I with acc. of person or thing aimed at, throw so as to hit, hit with a missile, freq. opp. striking with a weapon in the hand,βλήμενος ἠὲ τυπείς Il.15.495
;τὸν βάλεν, οὐδ' ἀφάμαρτε 11.350
, cf. 4.473, al.; so even inἐγγύθεν ἐλβὼν βεβλήκει.. δουρί 5.73
; and ; but later opp. τοξεύειν, D.9.17, X.An.4.2.12; ἐκ χειρὸς β. ib.3.3.15: c. dat. instrumenti, β. τινὰ δουρί, πέτρῳ, κεραυνῷ, etc., Il.13.518, 20.288, Od.5.128, etc.:βλήμενος ἢ ἰῷ ἢ ἔγχεϊ Il.8.514
: c. dupl. acc. pers. et partis,μιν βάλε μηρὸν ὀϊστῷ 11.583
: c. acc. partis only, 5.19, 657; soτὸν δ' Ὀδυσεὺς κατὰ λαιμὸν.. βάλεν ἰῷ Od.22.15
;δουρὶ βαλὼν πρὸς στῆθος Il. 11.144
: c. acc. cogn.,ἕλκος.., τό μιν βάλε Πάνδαρος ἰῷ 5.795
; also βάλε Τυδεΐδαο κατ' ἀσπίδα smote upon it, ib. 281.2 less freq. of things, ; of drops of blood, 11.536, cf. A.Ag. 1390: metaph., , cf. HF 1219; of the sun, ἀκτῖσιν ἔβαλλεν [θάμνους] Od.5.479;ἔβαλλε.. οὐρανὸν Ἠώς A.R.4.885
(so [voice] Pass.,σελήνη.. δι' εὐτρήτων βαλλομένη θυρίδων AP5.122
(Phld.)); strike the senses, of sound,ἵππων ὠκυπόδων ἀμφὶ κτύπος οὔατα βάλλει Il.10.535
, cf. S.Ant. 1188, Ph. 205 (lyr.); of smell,ὀσμὴ β. τινά Id.Ant. 412
;τάχ' ἂν πέμφιξ σε βροντῆς καὶ δυσοσμίας β. Id.Fr. 538
.3 metaph., β. τινὰ κακοῖς, φθόνῳ, ψόγῳ, smite with reproaches, etc., Id.Aj. 1244, E.El. 902, Ar. Th. 895;στεφάνοις β. τινά Pi.P.8.57
(hence metaph., praise, Id.O.2.98);φθόνος βάλλει A.Ag. 947
;φίλημα βάλλει τὴν καρδίαν Ach.Tat. 2.37
.II with acc. of the weapon thrown, cast, hurl, of missiles, rare in Hom.,βαλὼν βέλος Od.9.495
; . 346, cf. Od.20.62;ἐν νηυσὶν.. πῦρ β. Il.13.629
: c. dat., of the weapon, throw or shoot with a thing,οἱ δ' ἄρα χερμαδίοισι.. βάλλον 12.155
;βέλεσι Od.16.277
: in Prose abs., β. ἐπί τινα throw at one, Th.8.75;ἐπὶ σκοπόν X.Cyr.1.6.29
;ἐπίσκοπα Luc.Am.16
; alone,οἱ ψιλοὶ βάλλοντες εἶργον Th.4.33
: c. gen., βάλλοντα τοῦ σκοποῦ hitting the mark, Pl.Sis. 391a.2 generally of anything thrown,εἰς ἅλα λύματ' ἔβαλλον Il.1.314
;τὰ μὲν ἐν πυρὶ βάλλε Od.14.429
; [νῆα] β. ποτὶ πέτρας 12.71
; εὐνὰς β. throw out the anchor-stones, 9.137; β. σπόρον cast the seed, Theoc.25.26;β. κόπρον POxy.934.9
(iii A. D.): henceβ. ἀρούρας
manure,PFay.
118.21 (ii A. D.): metaph.,ὕπνον.. ἐπὶ βλεφάροις β. Od.1.364
;β. σκότον ὄμμασι E.Ph. 1535
(lyr.);β. λύπην τινί S.Ph.67
.b of persons, β. τινὰ ἐν κονίῃσιν, ἐν δαπέδῳ, Il.8.156, Od. 22.188;γῆς ἔξω β. S.OT 622
;β. τινὰ ἄθαπτον Id.Aj. 1333
; :—[voice] Pass.,ὑπὸ χλαίνῃ βεβλημένος AP5.164
(Mel.); on a sick-bed,Ev.Matt.
8.14: then metaph.,ἐς κακὸν β. τινά Od. 12.221
;ὅς με μετ'.. ἔριδας καὶ νείκεα β. Il.2.376
; β. τινὰ ἐς ἔχθραν, ἐς φόβον, A.Pr. 390, E.Tr. 1058; also ἐν αἰτίᾳ or αἰτίᾳ β. τινά, S.OT 657, Tr. 940 (but in E.Tr. 305 β. αἰτίαν ἔς τινα); κινδύνῳ β. τινά A.Th. 1053
.3 let fall,ἑτέρωσε κάρη βάλεν Il.8.306
, cf. 23.697;β. ἀπὸ δάκρυ παρειῶν Od.4.198
, cf. 114;κατὰ βλεφάρων β. δάκρυα Thgn. 1206
;κατ' ὄσσων E.Hipp. 1396
;αἵματος πέμφιγα πρὸς πέδῳ β. A.Fr. 183
; β. τοὺς ὀδόντας cast, shed them, Arist.HA 501b2, etc.; so βάλλειν alone, ib. 576a4;βοῦς βεβληκώς SIG958.7
([place name] Ceos).4 of the eyes, ἑτέρωσε βάλ' ὄμματα cast them, Od.16.179; ;πρόσωπον εἰς γῆν Id.Or. 958
: intr., ὀφθαλμὸς πρὸς τὸ φῶς βαλών aiming at.., Plot.2.4.5; βαλὼν πρὸς αὐτό directing one's gaze at.., Id.3.8.10.5 of animals, push forward or in front,τοὺς σοὺς [ἵππους] πρόσθε βαλών Il.23.572
; πλήθει πρόσθε βαλόντες (sc. ἵππους) ib. 639;βάλλε κάτωθε τὰ μοσχία Theoc.4.44
: metaph.,β. ψυχὰν ποτὶ κέρδεα BionFr.5.12
.6 in a looser sense, put, place, with or without a notion of haste,τὼ μὲν.. βαλέτην ἐν χερσὶν ἑταίρων Il.5.574
, cf. 17.40, 21.104;μῆλα.. ἐν νηΐ β. Od.9.470
;ἐπὶ γᾶν ἴχνος ποδὸς β. E.Rh. 721
(lyr.);φάσγανον ἐπ' αὐχένος β. Id.Or.51
;τοὺς δακτύλους εἰς τὰ ὦτα Ev.Marc.7.33
; β. πλίνθους lay bricks, Edict.Diocl.7.15; pour,οἶνον εἰς ἀσκούς Ev.Matt.9.17
;εἰς πίθον Arr.Epict.4.13.12
, cf. Dsc.1.71.5 (v.l. for ἐμβ.): metaph.,ἐν στήθεσσι μένος βάλε ποιμένι λαῶν Il.5.513
; ὅπως.. φιλότητα μετ' ἀμφοτέροισι βάλωμεν may put friendship between them, 4.16; ;ἐν καρδίᾳ β. Pi.O.13.16
; but also θυμῷ, ἐς θυμὸν β., lay to heart, A.Pr. 706, S.OT 975.b esp. of putting round,ἀμφ' ὀχέεσσι θοῶς βάλε καμπύλα κύκλα Il.5.722
; of clothes or arms,ἀμφὶ δ' Ἀθήνη ὤμοις.. βάλ' αἰγίδα 18.204
; put on,φαιὰ ἱμάτια Plb. 30.4.5
.d pay, PLond.3.1177 (ii A. D.), POxy.1448.5 (iv A. D.).7 of dice, throw,τρὶς ἓξ βαλεῖν A.Ag.33
, cf. Pl.Lg. 968e;ἄλλα βλήματ' ἐν κύβοις βαλεῖν E.Supp. 330
: so prob. ψῆφος βαλοῦσα, abs., by its throw, A.Eu. 751: metaph., εὖ or to be lucky, successful,Phld.
lr.p.51 W., Rh.1.10 S.III intr., fall,ποταμὸς Μινυήϊος εἰς ἅλα βάλλων Il.11.722
, cf. A.R.2.744, etc.; ἄνεμος κατ' αὐτῆς (sc. νεώς)ἔβαλε Act.Ap.27.14
; [ἵππους] περὶ τέρμα βαλούσας having run round the post, Il.23.462; ἐγὼ δὲ.. τάχ' ἐν πέδῳ βαλῶ (sc. ἐμαυτήν) A.Ag. 1172 (lyr.); λίμνηθεν ὅτ' εἰς ἁλὸς οἶδμα βάλητε arrive at.., A.R.4.1579; εἴσω β. enter a river's mouth, Orac. ap.D.S.8.23; βαλὼν κάθευδε lie down and sleep, Arr.Epict.2.20.10; τί οὖν, οὐ ῥέγκω βαλών; ib.4.10.29; ap. POxy.1368.51; cf. A. 11.4.2 in familiar language, away with you! be hanged!Ar.
V. 835, etc.;βάλλ' ἐς μακαρίαν Pl.Hp.Ma. 293a
, cf. Men.Epit. 389.B [voice] Med., put for oneself, ὡς ἐνὶ θυμῷ βάλλεαι that thou may'st lay it to heart, Il.20.196, cf. Od.12.218;σὺ δ' ἐνὶ φρεσὶ βάλλεο σῇσιν Hes.Op. 107
;εἰ μὲν δὴ νόστον γε μετὰ φρεσὶ.. βάλλεαι Il.9.435
;ἐς θυμὸν βαλέσθαι τι Hdt.1.84
, etc.; εἰς or ἐπὶ νοῦν, εἰς μνήμην, Plu.Thes. 24, Jul.Or.2.58a, etc. (v. supr. A.11.6); ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν βαλόμενοι on their own responsibility, Hdt.4.160, cf. 3.71, al.; ἑτέρως ἐβάλοντο θεοί, v. l. for ἐβόλοντο in Od.1.234;θεοὶ δ' ἑτέρωσε βάλοντο Q.S.1.610
.2 τόξα or ξίφος ἀμφ' ὤμοισιν βάλλεσθαι throw about one's shoulder, Il.10.333, 19.372, etc.;ἐπὶ κάρα στέφη β. E.IA 1513
(lyr.).4 lay as foundation,κρηπῖδα βαλέσθαι Pi.P.7.3
, cf. 4.138, Luc.Hipp.4; also, lay the foundations of, begin to form,οἰκοδομίας Pl.Lg. 779b
;χάρακα Plb.3.105.10
, Poll. 8.161; simply, build,ἱερὸν περί τι Philostr.VA4.13
; β. ἄγκυραν cast anchor, Hdt.9.74, etc.; .II rarely, χρόα βάλλεσθαι λουτροῖς dash oneself with water, bathe, h.Cer.50 (butλουτρὰ ἐπὶ χροῒ βαλεῖν E.Or. 303
). (Arc. - δέλλω in ἐς-δέλλοντες, = ἐκ-βάλλοντες, IG5(2).6.49: ζέλλειν· βάλλειν, Hsch. Root g[uglide]el- 'throw', Skt. galati 'trickle', OHG. quellan 'spurt up', Lith. gulēti 'lie'.) -
60 κρατέω
κρᾰτ-έω, [dialect] Aeol. [full] κρετέω, [tense] aor. inf. [full] κρέτησαι Sapph. Supp.9.5:— [voice] Med., [tense] aor. ἐπι-κρατησάμενοι v.l. in Gal.UP6.13:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.Aκρατήσομαι Aristid.1.501
J. and, with v.l. κρατηθήσομαι, Th.4.9:—to be strong, powerful: hence,I abs., rule, hold sway,Ἤλιδα.., ὅθι κρατέουσιν Ἐπειοί Od.13.275
,15.298; μέγα κρατέων ἤνασσε with mighty sway.., Il.16.172;ἅπας δὲ τραχύς, ὅστις ἂν νέον κρατῇ A.Pr.35
; ὁ κρατῶν the ruler, Id.Ag. 951, 1664, S.Ant. 738, etc.;θῶπτε τὸν κρατοῦντ' ἀεί A.Pr. 937
;οἱ κρατοῦντες Id.Ch. 267
, S.OT 530, etc.;τὸ κρατοῦν E.Andr. 133
(lyr.), Pl.Lg. 714c, Arist.Pol. 1255a15; ἡ κρατοῦσα the lady of the house, A.Ch. 734.2 in Poets, c. dat., rule among,μέγα κρατέεις νεκύεσσιν Od.11.485
;ἀνδράσι καὶ θεοῖσι 16.265
; Φθίᾳ rule in Phthia, Pi.N.4.50;ἐν Ἰλιάδι χθονί E.El.4
.3 c. gen., to be lord or master of, rule over, πάντων Ἀργείων, πάντων, Il.1.79, 288, cf. Od. 15.274; (lyr.); ; ; κ. τοῦ βίου to be master of.., And.1.137;αὑτοῦ κ. S.Aj. 1099
, Antipho 5.26, cf. S.OC 405;ἡδονῶν καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν Pl.Smp. 196c
, etc.;τῶν πραγμάτων D.2.27
; τοῦ μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς νόμοις κρατῆσαι to be above obedience.., X.Lac.4.6.II conquer, prevail, get the upper hand, abs., A.Ag. 324, etc.;πολλῷ ἐκράτησαν Hdt.5.77
;εἰ τὰ τοῦ Μήδου κρατήσειε Th.3.62
;ὁ μὴ πειθόμενος κρατεῖ Pl.Phdr. 272b
;ἔνθα τἀναιδὲς κρατεῖ Diph.111
: c. dat. modi, κ. τῇ γνώμῃ prevail in opinion, Hdt.9.42; πάλᾳ, ἱπποδρομίᾳ, Pi.O.8.20, I.3.13; ;ταῖς ναυσί Ar.Ach. 648
;τῷ Φοινίκων ναυτικῷ Th.1.16
; alsoθουρίῳ ἐν Ἄρει S.Aj. 614
(lyr.);ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις Ar.Pl. 184
: c.acc.cogn.,κ. στάδιον B. 6.15
, cf. 7;ὀκτὼ νίκας E.Epigr.1
;τὸν ἀγῶνα D.21.18
; τὴν μάχην v.l. for τῇ μάχῃ in D.S.18.30;τὴν πρεσβείαν Philostr.VS1.21.6
; πάντα in all things, S.OT 1522; οἱ κρατοῦντες the conquerors, X.An.3.2.26;τὰ κατὰ πόλεμον κρατούμενα τῶν κρατούντων εἶναί φασιν Arist.Pol. 1255a7
.c of reports, etc., prevail, become current,φάτις κρατεῖ A.Supp. 293
, S.Aj. 978;λόγος κ. A.Pers. 738
; ;κρατεῖ ἡ φήμη παρά τισι Plb. 9.26.11
.2 c.inf., prevail so that,κ. τῷ πλήθει ὥστε μὴ αὐτίκα τὰς πύλας ἀνοίγεσθαι Th.4.104
: impers., κατθανεῖν κρατεῖ 'tis better to.., A.Ag. 1364;κρατεῖ μὴ γιγνώσκοντ' ἀπολέσθαι E.Hipp. 248
(anap.).3 c.gen., conquer, prevail over,τῶν ἐναντίων S.Fr.85
, cf. OC 646, A.Th. 955 (lyr.), etc.;κ. τινὸς τὸν ἀγῶνα Philostr.Her.2.5
: metaph., ; κ. τῆς διαβολῆς get the better of it, Lys.19.53; ὁ λόγος τοῦ ἔργου ἐκράτει surpassed, went beyond it, Th.1.69; ἡ φύσις.. τῶν διδαγμάτων κρατεῖ is better than.., Men. Mon. 213, cf. 169.b of food, digest, assimilate, Hp.VM3,14, Mnesith. ap. Ath.2.54b, Phylotim.ib.3.79c:—[voice] Pass., Hp.Epid.6.5.15;τῆς τροφῆς μὴ κρατηθείσης Plu.2.654b
.4 c.acc., conquer, master, Pi.N.10.25, A.Pr. 215, Th. 189, E.Alc. 490, Ar.Nu. 1346, Av. 420, X. An.7.6.32, etc.; μάχῃ, τῷ πολέμῳ τινά, Th.6.2, Aeschin.2.30;τῷ λόγῳ τινά Ar.V. 539
; πάχει μάκει τε in.., Pi.P.4.245; outdo,τοὺς φίλους εὖ ποιῶν X.Hier.11.15
; ; surpass,κρατεῖ δὲ ὁ τῆς ἡδονῆς [βίος] τὸν τῆς φρονήσεως Pl.Phlb. 12a
:—[voice] Pass., to be overcome, A.Th. 750 (lyr.), etc.; (lyr.);ὑπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου Hdt.2.121
.δ'; ὑπὸ τῶν ἡδονῶν Pl.Lg. 633e
.III become master of, get possession of, τῆς ἀρχῆς, τῶν νεκρῶν, Hdt.1.92,4.111;πολλὰ φρονέοντα μηδενὸς κ. Id.9.16
; ;οὔπω ἡ βουλή σου ἐκράτει Lys.13.26
;κ. τῆς γῆς Th.3.6
;ναυσὶ τῆς θαλάσσης Pl.Mx. 240a
; κ. τῆς λέξεως have it at command, remember it, Ath.7.275b; master by the intellect,πάντων τῶν τῆς ἱστορίας μερῶν Plb.16.20.2
:—[voice] Pass., to be mastered,δεῖ ἐν ταῖς τέχναις καὶ ἐπιστήμαις ταῦτα κρατεῖσθαι Arist.Pol. 1331b38
, cf. Po. 1456a10 (prob.for κροτεῖσθαι).2 c.acc.rei, seize, win and keep, esp.by force,πᾶσαν αἶαν A.Supp. 255
; ; seize, hold fast, arrest, τινα Batr.63, Plb.8.18.8, Ev.Matt.14.3;τένοντα Batr.233
;τὰς χεῖράς τινος PLips. 40iii2
(iv/v A.D.); secure, grasp, τὴν ἀκατονόμαστον Τριάσα Zos.Alch.p.230 B.3 hold up, support, τινα D.H.4.38; maintain a military post, X.An.5.6.7; hold fast,τὰς παραδόσεις 2 Ep.Thess.2.15
; keep, retain, PTeb.61 (b).229 (ii B.C.):—[voice] Pass., οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ' αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ θανάτου) Act.Ap.2.24; ἡ κτῆσις τοῖς τέκνοις κεκράτηται has been reserved for, settled upon, POxy. 237 viii 36 (ii A.D.).4 in Law, possess a title to, κ. καὶ κυριεύειν c.gen., PTeb.319.19 (iii A.D.), etc.b sequester, place under embargo, OGI1669.23 ([voice] Pass., Egypt, i A.D.), BGU 742 iii 6 ([voice] Pass., ii A.D.).5 hold in the hand, ;πόαν Dsc.3.93
;ἄρτον Plu.2.99d
;σκῆπτρον Ath.7.289c
, cf. Luc.Am.44, Ach.Tat.1.6, etc.;δακτύλιον PMag.Lond.46.451
(iv A.D.).V control, command, A.Ag.10, E. Hec. 282:—[voice] Pass., αἰσχρὰ τῷ νόμῳ κρατούμενα controlled by.., Ar.Av. 755;κρατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ προβουλεύματος D.H.9.52
;διαθέσει Porph. Sent.27
.
См. также в других словарях:
επί — (AM ἐπί) (πρόθεση) Ι. (με γεν.) 1. επάνω σε μια επιφάνεια ή σ ένα σημείο («επί τής στέγης», «καθέζετ ἐπὶ θρόνου») 2. σχετικά με κάτι, σε αναφορά με κάτι («επί τού θέματος, επί τής ουσίας», «ἐπὶ καλοῡ λέγων παιδός») 3. χρονική περίοδος κατά την… … Dictionary of Greek
Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες της Αμερικής — Επίσημη ονομασία: Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες της Αμερικής Συντομευμένη ονομασία: ΗΠΑ (USA) Έκταση: 9.629.091 τ. χλμ Πληθυσμός: 278.058.881 κάτ. (2001) Πρωτεύουσα: Ουάσινγκτον (6.068.996 κάτ. το 2002)Κράτος της Βόρειας Αμερικής. Συνορεύει στα Β με τον… … Dictionary of Greek
σελήνη — (Αστρον.). Ο μοναδικός φυσικός δορυφόρος της Γης. Τα γενικά γνωρίσματα του ήταν γνωστά από την αρχαιότητα στους αστρονόμους, τα γεωλογικά όμως και φυσικά χαρακτηριστικά του μόλις τώρα αρχίζουν να αποκαλύπτονται με τα στοιχεία που πρόσφεραν οι… … Dictionary of Greek
προβολή — Ο όρος χρησιμοποιείται στα μαθηματικά σε διάφορες περιπτώσεις, ιδιαίτερα μάλιστα στη γεωμετρία. 1. Αν ε, η είναι δύο ευθείες, όχι παράλληλες σε ένα επίπεδο Ε, τότε ονομάζεται προβολή ενός σημείου Μ του επιπέδου Ε πάνω στην ευθεία ε παράλληλα με… … Dictionary of Greek
Geflügelte Worte (Antike) — Alpha und Omega, Anfang und Ende, kombiniert zu einem Buchstaben Diese Liste ist eine Sammlung alt und neugriechischer Phrasen, Sprichwörter und Redewendungen. Sie beschreibt ihren Gebrauch und gibt, wo möglich, die Quellen an. Graeca non… … Deutsch Wikipedia
πρόσοδος — Όρος που χρησιμοποιείται για το σύνολο των εσόδων που εισπράττει περιοδικά ένα πρόσωπο (τόκοι, μερίσματα, ενοίκια, διατροφές κλπ.), ή γενικότερα για το εισόδημα που έχει κάποιος χωρίς να εργάζεται. Στην οικονομία η π. (ή συνηθέστερα η έγγεια π.) … Dictionary of Greek
Fass ohne Boden — Pi Inhaltsverzeichnis 1 πάθει μάθος 2 Παθήματα μαθήματα … Deutsch Wikipedia
παράλλαξη — (Μαθημ.). Η γωνία που σχηματίζουν οι οπτικές κατευθύνσεις προς ένα ορισμένο αντικείμενο, όταν το παρατηρούμε από δύο διαφορετικά σημεία. Αν γνωρίζουμε την π. και την απόσταση μεταξύ των δύο σημείων παρατήρησης, είναι εύκολο να βρούμε την απόσταση … Dictionary of Greek
Nicene Creed — Icon depicting Emperor Constantine (center) and the Fathers of the First Council of Nicaea of 325 as holding the Niceno–Constantinopolitan Creed of 381 The Nicene Creed (Latin: Symbolum Nicaenum) is the creed or profession of faith (Greek:… … Wikipedia
Festina lente — Sigma Inhaltsverzeichnis 1 Σ αγαπώ. 2 Σαρδόνιος γέλως … Deutsch Wikipedia
Liste griechischer Phrasen/Sigma — Sigma Inhaltsverzeichnis 1 Σ αγαπώ … Deutsch Wikipedia